Operation Reference
Grass Valley Model 2200
Video Production Switcher
Software Release 5.3
071-0154-00
First Printing: December 1995
Revised Printing: February, 1998
Contents
Preface
Welcome to the Model 2200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Organization of This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
How to Use this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Conventions Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Button References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Menu References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Section 1 — System Overview
Basic Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Standard Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Signal Processor Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Video Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Description of Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Chromatte Advanced Chroma Keyer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
BORDERLINE Key Edge Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
iii
Contents
Secondary Wipe Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Effects Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Frame Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Look Ahead Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Tally Relay Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Remote Aux Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
LED Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Auto Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Panel Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Transition Subpanels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Transition Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Keyer Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
KEY ON Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Key Type Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Key Source Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Split Key Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Other Key Modifier Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Borderline Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Auto Preview Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Mask Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
iv
Chroma Keyer Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Matte Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Matte Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Effects Memory Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
E-MEM Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Enable Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Effect Editing Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Run Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Positioner Joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Wipe Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Wipe Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Wipe Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Wipe Pattern Mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Wipe Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Wipe Pattern Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Wipe Positioner Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Masks Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Mask Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Mask Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Mask Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
v
Contents
Frame Store Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Frame Store Features: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Input Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Output Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Still Image Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Drop Shadow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
External Interface Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
Background Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
Matte Select Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
Effects Send Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
Bus Delegate Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
Input Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
Remote Aux Bus Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
Rear Panel Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
Remote Aux Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
Chop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
Joy Stick Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
Programming the Joy Stick Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
Effects Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104
vi
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Menu Display Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Menu Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Menu Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Configuration Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Keyer Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Preview Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Beeper Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Set Clock Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Processor Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Inputs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Map Inputs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
GPI Inputs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Outputs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
External Interface Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Editor Interface Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
For Krystal: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
For devices which must be set up manually: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
DPM K’SCOPE Sources Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
DPM Map Aux Buses Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
DPM Map Inputs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Mapping DPM Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Peripheral Interface Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
GPI Outputs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
vii
Contents
Aux Bus Format Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
M/ E Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
M/ E Copy Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
System Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Keyer Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Keyer Copy Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Chroma Key Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
Wipe Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
Wipe Pattern Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
Wipe Texture Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Wipe Copy Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
E-MEM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
Source Hold Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Keyframe Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
Delegates and Enables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
Example 1 – Inserting a Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
Effect Run with Auto Run On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
Pause on First or Last Keyframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
Aux Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
Mask Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
Matte Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
Matte Copy Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106
viii
Frame Store Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
Video Store Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
Key Store Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-124
Miscellaneous Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128
Signal Processing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-129
Safe Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-130
Disk Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131
Load File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134
Save File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-136
Utilities Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-139
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Top Level Menu Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Menu Tree Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Appendix A — Keyframe Path Control
Path Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Tension Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Continuity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Bias Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Index
ix
Contents
x
Preface
Welcome to the Model 2200
This Model 2200 Operation Reference provides detailed information
about the control panel functions and associated menu selections
used to operate the Model 2200-2 Component Digital Switching
Systems.
The Model 2200 document library set consists of:
■
■
■
■
■
■
Operation Reference
User Guide
Installation and Service Manual
Drawings Manual
Replacement Parts List
Installation and Planning Guide (optional)
The Model 2200 Operation Reference lists and briefly describes
every button, knob, control, lever, and menu selection the
switcher has to offer. Use this manual in conjunction with the
Model 2200 User Guide when learning switcher functions, and/ or
as a reference and “memory jogger” during daily switcher
operation.
xi
Preface
The Model 2200 User Guide contains a system overview, software
configuration, startup, switcher concepts, and task-oriented
procedures for switcher functions. This book may be used when
learning about, or enhancing your knowledge of, switcher
operations.
The Model 2200 Installation and Service manual contains a hardware
overview, hardware system installation instructions, general
maintenance information, and functional descriptions of the
Signal Processor Frame and Control Panel power supplies,
modules and mezzanine circuit boards.
Organization of This Manual
This manual is organized as follows:
Control Panel Descriptions – Describes the Model 2200 control
panel functions.
Menu Descriptions – Describes all software menus used to set
up switcher parameters.
Menu Trees – Graphical depiction of switcher hierarchical menu
structure.
xii
How to Use this Manual
How to Use this Manual
This reference manual assumes you have read, or understood, the
contents of the User Guide and the System Overview and
Functional Descriptions in the Installation and Service manual, so
that you will be familiar with the basic terminology used in this
manual and the structure of the hardware/ software system.
If you are a switcher pro, and you know the switcher like the back
of your hand, then you’ll probably dive right in, referring
occasionally to this book and the User Guide.
If you are not a switcher pro, you should read or scan the Control
Panel Descriptions section to get an idea of the functions of the
switcher subpanels and controls.
For quickly locating specific areas of interest, refer to the Table of
Contents at the front of each manual section. This “local” table of
contents is provided behind each tabbed divider so that you don’t
have to go all the way to the front of the manual to locate the
information in a particular section.
If you have any comments about this manual, we would like to
hear from you. Please write to:
Tektronix, Inc.
Grass Valley Products
Technical Publications Department
PO Box 1114
Grass Valley, CA 95945
xiii
Preface
Conventions Used in this Manual
The following graphical and typestyle conventions are used
throughout this manual.
Button References
A control panel button is shown as follows:
Bkgd
A
Or, when used in the text, is shown in boldface type:
BKGD A
Panel Knob References
Similarly, a control panel knob is shown as follows:
Brightness
Or, when used in the text, is shown in boldface type:
BRIGHTNESS
xiv
Conventions Used in this Manual
Menu References
Many Model 2200 features may be accessed via the menu display
and its associated “soft” buttons and “soft” knobs. The term “soft”
means that the function of the button or knob is assigned via the
currently displayed menu.
An illustration similar to the following may be used when you
need to access a function via the menu
NUMBER OF CHANNELS
DPM MAP AUX BUSES MENU
config/extern if/dpm setup/dpm map aux buses
= 2
Connection of physical AUX buses
to physical channels
CHANNEL 1
= AUX 3
MISC
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
CHAN 1 CHAN 2
CHAN 3 CHAN 4 CHAN 5 CHAN 6 CHAN 7 CHAN 8
DPM 1
DPM 2
DPM 3
DPM 4
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
AUX 4
AUX 5
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DPM 2
DEVICE
SELECT
EXIT
NOTE: For clarity, menus shown in the body of this manual will not
display the “soft knobs” (the 4 shaded circles to the right of the menu), or
the “soft buttons” (the 9 shaded boxes below the menu). The function
labels (for example, “DEVICE SELECT”, and “NUMBER OF
CHANNELS”) will remain.
NOTE: The four buttons shown adjacent to the soft knobs are used with
the Krystal DPM functions (that is, the Model 2200-i) when so
configured.
xv
Preface
xvi
System Overview
1
This section presents a general description of the Grass Valley
Products Model 2200-2 Production Component Digital Switching
Systems.
The Control Panel and Signal Processor descriptions provide a
basic knowledge of the Model 2200 basic architecture.
Basic Architecture
The Model 2200 is a component digital switcher. It can manipulate
CCIR 601 serial component digital and analog component video
and key signals through the use of 10-bit digital processing. An
Analog Chroma Keyer Input Module is also available.
The Model 2200-2 provides two full function mix/ effects
subsystems. Up to 32 serial digital inputs which can be mapped to
switcher crosspoint buttons and used as video and/ or key
sources. Internal sources are also available, such as Black, Masks,
Color Bars, and Background.
Effects animation functionality may be used to build and run a
sequence of effects. Effects are stored in E-MEM registers as a list
of “keyframes” (see the User Guide), for a definition of
Keyframes). The E-MEM register operations are used to learn,
recall, copy, and link effect registers.
The layout of the Control Panel is logically structured for efficient
control of video signals.The Menu Display Subpanel allows quick
changes to switcher system parameters.
1-1
Section 1 — System Overview
Standard Features
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
2 Mix/ Effects Systems
Auto-Timed Inputs
Shaped and Unshaped Video Input Conditioning
Fineline Keying
Key Channel Throughout
10-Bit Data Processing Throughout
Full Complement of Wipe Patterns
E-MEM with Disk Storage
100 E-MEM registers for Keyframe effects
Multiple-event Keyframes/ Effects within a single E-MEM
Register
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
User-Preference Programming
Safe Title / Area Generators
Extensive Masking
Complex Matte Generators
Analog Output Program/ Preview Capability
Default switcher state —User defined or GVG factory setting
Chroma Key Auto Setup
1-2
Optional Features
Optional Features
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
BORDERLINE on all Keyers
Dual Chroma Keyers for each M/ E
Second Wipe Pattern Generator for each M/ E
1
Kaleidoscope Run Control and Effects Recall
Two-Channel Effects Send
Three Additional Timed Aux Buses
Key Outputs
Preview Outputs
Tally Outputs
DPM Port
Redundant Power Supplies
Module Extenders
Refer to the end of this section for descriptions of the optional
features.
1. Requires a GVG Kaleidoscope DPM and the Kaleidoscope Interface Upgrade Kit (cur-
rently shipped, to customers who have purchased Kaleidoscope, with the 4.0 Software Re-
lease Package, Part No. 074825-07).
1-3
Section 1 — System Overview
Physical Description
The switcher consists of three main areas: the Control Panel, the
Signal Processor Frame, and the Frame Power Supply (see s) The
electronic circuitry for the Model 2200 is contained on circuit
boards and modules in the Signal Processor Frame and Control
Panel.
Signal Processor Frame
The Signal Processor Frame is a large rack-mounted unit that
houses the system Controller, Mix/ Effect logic and processors,
Input/ Output interfaces, and Expansion circuit modules.
In addition to the basic system, a typical system may have several
options such as Chroma Keyers, Secondary Wipe Generators, and
Effects Send. Most options are available as circuit board modules
(or submodules called “mezzanine” boards) that are installed in
the Signal Processor Frame.
Refer to the Model 2200 Installation and Service manual for a
complete description of the Signal Processor.
A main processor and separate M/ E processors reside within the
Signal Processor Frame. Since each M/ E has its own processor,
failure of one processor does not disable the entire switcher.
Individual effects can continue to operate independently in a
limited capacity.
1-4
Physical Description
EFFECTS SEND
MATRIX
MIX EFFECTS
PROCESSOR
Video/Key
Signals In
Video/Key
Signals Out
MIX EFFECTS
PROCESSOR
MIX EFFECTS
PROCESSOR
Signal
Processor
Frame
CONTROL
PROCESSOR
Processor Frame
Power Supply
CONTROL
PANEL
LOGIC
Status
Terminal
CONTROL PANEL
POWER SUPPLY
Control Panel
Figure 1-1. Simplified Block Diagram of the Model 2200
1-5
Section 1 — System Overview
Control Panel
The Control Panel is the operator interface for the Model 2200
system. The operator performs all actions via buttons and knobs
and a software-driven menu.
External Interface
Chroma Keyer
Y
Effect
Switcher
R
Editor
Enable
GPI
Enable
Periph
Enable
Effect
Config
Picture
Mixer
Config
M/E
Mode
M
B
Frame Store
G
Panel
Setup
Picture
Frame
Keyer
C
hroma
Key
Drop
Shadow
Background
C
M/E 1
Sec
M/E 2
Sec
Effect
Oper
Key/
Stencil
Status
Wipe
Horizontal Vertical Opacity
Position Position
Wash
Wash
Shadow
On
Hue/
Softness
Freeze
Grab
Field
1
Field
2
Flat
Matte
Matte 2
E-MEM
Key
Frame
View
Shadow
Opacity
Selectivity
Auto
Setup
Video
Store
Key
Store
Run
Control
Input/
Output
Mask
Matte
Bkgd
Supr
Saturation/
Offset
Graphic
Display
Path
Aux
Bus
Frame
Store
Chroma
Lum
M/E 2
Bkgd
1
Bkgd
2
M/E 1
Key
M/E 1
Key
M/E 2
Key
Clear
Menu
Disk
Misc
1
2
1
Key
2
Brightness
Aux 1-4 Effects Send Only
Pvw
Aux
M/E 1 M/E 1 M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 2
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Bkgd
Shift
M/E 1 M/E 2
A
Key 1 Key
2
A
Key 1
1
2
3
4
2
3
Pgm
Pgm
Transition
Effect
Effect
Effect
Key
Key
Key
1
2
Uncal
Uncal
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Bkgd
Shift
Shift
Shift
Key
1
Bkgd
B
Bkgd
Key
2
Key
Priority
1
2
3
4
2
3
A
On
On
On
On
A
B
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Bkgd
Layered
Over
Over
Uncal
Uncal
1
2
3
4
2
3
Preset
Black
Mix
Wipe
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Bkgd
1
2
3
4
2
3
Cut
Auto
Tran
60
GF 1 GF 2 TK 1 RTD1 GF 2
Transition
Uncal
Effect
Key
A
Key
Key
1
2
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Bkgd
Shift
Shift
Shift
M/E 1
M/E 1
M/E 1
1
2
3
4
2
3
Bkgd
Bkgd
A
B
Uncal
On
On
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Bkgd
Layered
Uncal
1
2
3
4
2
3
Mix
Cut
Wipe
B
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Bkgd
Uncal
1
2
3
4
2
3
Auto
Tran
1-6
Physical Description
The Control Panel also provides connectors for a status terminal
and the data link to the Signal Processor Frame.
Mask
Wipe
User
User
User
1
3
5
User
User
User
2
4
6
Soft
Top/Gain
Symmetry Softness
Border
Aspect
Left
Right
Opacity
Width
Menu
Random
Texture
User
Wipe
Undo
Learn
User
Wipe
Bottom/Clip
Force
Mask
Inhibit
Mask
Mask
Invert
Preset Size Aspect
Rotate
Pos
Rotate
Speed
Rotate
Mag
Normal
Reverse
Flip
Flop
Split
H
Multi
V
Multi
Pos
Norm
Pos
Auto
Box
Pri
Wipe
Sec
Wipe
Mask
Bus
Rotate
Rotation Type
Wipe Direction
Pattern Modifiers
Positioner
Pattern
Mix
M/E 1
Pri
M/E 1
Sec
M/E 2
Pri
M/E 2
Sec
M/E 1
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 2
Key
1
Key
2
Key
1
Key
2
Model 2200
Exit
Pattern Mix
Delegate
Preview Only
Bus Delegate
2
M/E 2
Key 2
Pvw
Aux
4
Aux
5
M/E 1 M/E 2
Pvw
Mask Aux
1
Aux
2
Aux
3
Freeze
Video
Freeze
Key
Near
Side
Far
Side
Pvw
Keyer
Matte
Pri
Sec
Normal
Border
Shadow
Extrude
Outline
Source
T
arget
World
Camera
Axis
Lock
Wipe
Wash
Wipe
Wash
Stop
Next
KF
Borderline
Size/Position
Hue/
Rotate
Spin
Locate
3D
Size/
Locate
Knob
Control
Invert
Inhibit
Mask
Force
Mask
Show
Key
Key
Over
Matte 2
Softness
Flat
Matte
Hold
Input
Locate
Axis
Split
Key
Video
Key
Auto
Select
Key
Borderline
Opacity
Video
Fill
Matte
Fill
Reverse
Rewind
Run
K1 Fill
K2 Fill
K1 Border
K2 Border
Sec Wipe
Saturation/
Offset
Linear
Key
Lum
Key
C
hroma
Pri
Preset
Pattern
Sec
Preset
Pattern
Pri Wipe
Skew
X
Persp
Aspect
Z
Post
Xform
Chan 1
Chan 2
Global
Camera
Key
Gain
Clip
Matte
Select
Key
On
Bkgd
B
Bkgd
A
Key
2
Key
1
Center
M/E 1
Pri
M/E 1
Sec
M/E 2
Pri
M/E 2
Sec
Y
Brightness
Run Control
Keyer
Matte
E-MEM
Effect
Effect
Shadow
Extrude
Invert
Outline
Pri
Sec
Auto
Recall
Auto
Run
Clear
Work
Buffer
Const
Dur
Normal
Border
Prev
Next
Wipe
Wash
Wipe
Wash
1345804-42224438
Borderline
Key
1
Key
2
Key
Priority
Size/Position
Hue/
Chan 1
M/E 1
M/E 2
Lock
Get
Put
Inhibit
Mask
Force
Mask
Show
Key
Enable
All
+ / ---
Cut
Go
KF
To
Go
T
o
Key
Over
Softness
Flat
Matte
Matte 2
7
4
1
8
5
2
0
9
Time
Learn
On
Over
On
Over
Chan 2
Misc
Bkgd
Seq
Bank
0
1
Copy
Video
Fill
Matte
Fill
Split
Key
Video
Key
Auto
Select
Key
KF
Dur
Effect
Dur
Borderline
Opacity
K1 Fill
K2 Fill
K1 Border
K2 Border
Sec Wipe
6
Preset
Black
Saturation/
Offset
Pri Wipe
Global
Effect
Dis
Bank
Time
Cursor
Mark
Cursor
Paste
Mark
Insert
Before
Linear
Key
Lum
Key
C
hroma
Pri
Preset
Pattern
Sec
Preset
Pattern
3
Key
Gain
Clip
Trim
Camera
Key
On
Bkgd
B
Bkgd
A
Key
2
Matte
Select
Undo
Tran
Rate
Mark
Block
Modify
Insert
After
Key
1
.
Enter
60
Bank
Brightness
Enables
Edit
Figure 1-2. Model 2200-2 Control Panel
1-7
Section 1 — System Overview
Power Supplies
Two power supplies are used in the basic Model 2200 system: a
control panel power supply, located in the control panel tub, and
a 19" rack mount power supply used by the Signal Processor
Frame. Optional Redundant power supplies are available.
Video and Key Inputs and Outputs
Inputs
Two types of input modules may be installed in the Signal
Processor Frame to suit the needs of your installation. The
following types of input modules are available.
NOTE: Each of the serial or analog inputs can be treated by the switcher
as either a video input or a key input.
■
■
Serial Digital Input Module – provides 8 inputs, auto-timed
within a range of ±18 microseconds. Two modules are
supplied in the standard configuration. Two modules are
available as options. With four modules installed there are 32
inputs available.The modules are located in Bay C.
Chroma Key Input Modules (optional) – Either one or two
Chroma Key Input Modules may be configured. These
modules allow full bandwidth chroma keys. Each module has
two inputs. Each input has three BNC connectors labeled:
G/ V, B/ U, and R/ V. There is a separate gain adjustment near
each BNC connector. The format for each input is user-
selectable from RGB, YUV, Beta or MII. The module is located
in Bay C.
Refer to the Model 2200 Installation and Service manual, Section 3,
Functional Description, for more information.
Refer to the Model 2200 User Guide for information on assigning
input formats and adjusting the timing.
1-8
Physical Description
Outputs
Output modules are placed in the rear bay of the Signal Processing
Frame. The following module types are available:
■
Serial Output Modules (2 standard, each adding 8 outputs
with two BNCs)
■
Analog Output Module (1 optional with RGB/ Y, CR, CB and
Key outputs)
The standard Digital Output Modules have the following outputs:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Mask Bus
Switched Preview Video
M/ E 1 and M/ E 2 Program Video and Key
1
2
M/ E 1 Key or M/ E 1 Clean Feed
M/ E 2 Key or M/ E 2 Clean Feed
Aux Buses 1A through 2B
Framestore Video and Key
The optional Analog Output Module has the following outputs:
■
■
M/ E 2 Program Out
M/ E 2 Preview Out
1. No Lookahead Preview Option installed.
2. Lookahead Preview Option installed.
1-9
Section 1 — System Overview
Functional Description
General Overview
Figure 1-3 shows a simple video flow diagram for the Model 2200.
Video and key signals enter the input modules of the Model 2200,
which consist of component analog and/ or component serial
digital formats. The analog signals are converted to digital format,
and all inputs are timed and conditioned.
The digital signals are then passed to the Video and Effects Section
where keying and mixing take place. This section also provides
effect modifications, such as wipes and keyframing, that can be
applied to selected inputs.
In the Output Section, digital video and key signals are routed to
the Serial Digital Output Modules and the optional Analog
Output Module before leaving the Signal Processor.
Video Processing
Input video and key signal selections are made by the Crosspoint
Matrix under control of the system Controller, according to
operator assignments entered via the Control Panel.
In addition to primary (external) video, secondary (internal)
sources such as Masks, M/ E re-entry video, and optional Effects
Send are available as inputs to the crosspoint matrix.
Any suitable component digital signal from the Crosspoint matrix
may feed the Chromatte™ Chroma Keyer Module option. Analog
Component signals may also be used as Chroma Key sources.
Keyers in each Mix/ Effects bank provide outputs to the Mixer
Interface crosspoints. These outputs may be sent outside the
switcher for external processing, or may be routed to the M/ E
mixers and wipe generators. The Effects Send outputs can be
directed to the Framestore option for image capture.
1-10
Functional Description
Each M/ E has two keyers and two background buses (A and B) as
inputs. In standard mode, Keyers 1 and 2 can be mixed into a
composite video and key which can be forwarded to the output,
or M/ E 1 can be reentered into M/ E 2. In layered mode,
Background Buses A and B are also used as keyers.
Preview capability allows monitoring of sources at many points in
the signal flow. You can preview video from the M/ E mixers,
switched preview bus, or mask bus.
Eight GPI inputs are provided. You can assign each of the GPI
inputs via the GPI Input Menu to perform a specific function
when triggered.
The editor interface consists of an asynchronous RS-422, 38.4K
baud serial communications port, managed by a communications
processor. Refer to the Model 2200/ 3000/ 4000 Serial Protocols
manual for information on software functions and protocols
observed by the editor port.
1-11
Section 1 — System Overview
DUAL
CHROMA KEY
INPUT
MODULES
Component
DUAL
CHROMA
KEYER
Analog
Chroma Key
M/E1
Inputs
& M/E2
Chr. Key
Aux Bus
1A-4B
EFFECTS SEND
MODULES
80 X 48
VIDEO
CROSSPOINT
MATRIX
M/E
Video
and
SERIAL
DIGITAL
INPUT
Video Signals
In
Key
QUAD
KEYER
MODULES –
M/E 1
& M/E 2
MIXER
MODULE
CROSS-
POINTS
MODULES
Key Signals
In
ANALOG
INPUT
MODULES
Frame Store Video and Ke
M/E Program Video and Ke
Clocks
to all
modules
Clipped Mask and
Mask Store Video
Timing
Signals
to all
Switched Preview and Mask
ce
SYNC
GENERATOR
Black, Background 1 and 2, and Test Signa
Program, Preset, and DSK Video and Ke
gital
ce
video
modules
Aux Bus 5A-9B Video and Key
CONTROL PANEL
To/From
All Circuits
CONTROLLER
(control buses not
shown for clarity)
1-12
Functional Description
SECONDARY
WIPE
OPTION
Aux Bus 1A-4B
Video and Key
M/E 1
& M/E 2
MIXERS
Frame Store
Video
and Key
FRAME STORE
FOR VIDEO, KEY,
AND MASK
STORAGE
Mask
Store
Input
Mask
Store
Output
SERIAL
DIGITAL
AND
ANALOG
OUTPUT
MODULES
M/E 1 and M/E 2
Program Video
and Key
Outputs (Standard and Option
M/E Pvw
Video
Frame Store Video and Ke
PREVIEW
Program
Video
& Key
M/E 1 and M/E 2
DSK Pvw
Video
Program Video and Key
PGM/PST
MIXER
AND
Program Video and Key
DUAL DSK
& Clean
Feed
Video
Clean Feed Video
DSK Preview Video
Mask
Mask and
Switched Preview
M/E and DSK Preview
Switched Preview
M/E1 and M/E 2
Preview
DIAGNOSTIC
PROBE
DSK Preview
NOTE:
Primary Video Paths are
Indicated by Wide Arrows
Aux Bus Video and Key
Figure 1-3. Video
1-13
Section 1 — System Overview
Description of Options
The following options are currently available for the Model 2200
switcher. For more details on these options, refer to the
appropriate subpanel descriptions later in this manual.
Chromatte Advanced Chroma Keyer
Each foreground keyer in M/ E 1 and M/ E 2 has access to an
optional component chroma keyer. Either an internal component
digital signal or an external component analog signal from one of
the Chroma Key Input Modules can be used as the chroma key
source. Color background suppression, foreground suppression
and shadow processing are included as features.
BORDERLINE Key Edge Generation
BORDERLINE® Key Edge Generators are available for each keyer
in the switcher. The Borderline feature is implemented as a
submodule that plugs onto the Keyer module of any M/ E.
Each Borderline generator supports 1, 2, or 3 line wide borders for
border and outline modes and 1 to 6 line wide edges for shadow
and extrude modes. Fill within the key edges may be either video
or matte.
Secondary Wipe Generator
A Secondary Wipe Generator option provides a second pattern for
each M/ E. The Secondary Wipe Generator Submodules mount on
the M/ E 1 and M/ E 2 Mix/ Wipe Modules.
1-14
Description of Options
Effects Send
Frame Store
Effects Send provides a method of integrating digital effects
devices into the switcher mix/ effects system. Up to two send
channels can be used to route the video and key from an M/ E to
and from an external digital effects system.
Using software version 5.3 and later, the Frame Store option takes
the output of an M/ E Keyer, sends it to the Frame Store module,
then returns the output of the Frame Store to the Mix/ Wipe circuit
of the same M/ E in the switcher. This provides the effect of
inserting the Frame Store right into the M/ E, between the Keyer
and the Mix/ Wipe systems.
Look Ahead Preview
Look ahead preview processing is provided for both M/ Es with
this option. Submodules mount on the M/ E 1 and M/ E 2
Mix/ Wipe Modules.
Tally Relay Frame
The Tally Relay Frame provides external tally outputs that reflect
the switcher status. A rear-panel interconnect board provides the
relay contacts on two connectors for on-air Tally A and on-air Tally
B. The frame can hold up to three Tally Modules. Pinouts for the
Tally connectors are given in the Installation section of the Model
2200 Installation and Service manual.
1-15
Section 1 — System Overview
Remote Aux Bus
The Remote Aux Control Panel Option allows you to control the
Model 2200’s aux buses from a remote location. As many as 32
Remote Aux Panels can be daisy-chained to the switcher. There
are three Remote Aux Panel configurations available, identified by
the number of rack units (RUs) each occupies in the equipment
rack.
The panels are designed to control 32 external inputs (16 unshifted
and 16 shifted).
Timed Aux Output
The Timed Aux Output Module provides four independent
output pairs (video/ key) from aux buses 5A through 8B for use
with Kaleidoscope and DPM systems.
1-16
Control Panel Descriptions
2
Introduction
The Model 2200 Switcher is operated by a control panel
containing a source-select button matrix, various other groupings
of controls and a text and graphics menu display.
This section provides an overview of the Model 2200 control panel
menus and the functions available through the menus see
Section 3.
Control Panel
Figure 2-1 on page 2-2 shows the control panel and indicates the
grouping of the controls by operation.
2-1
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Model 2200-2i
Use
Backgrounds
Page 2-84
External
Interface
Chroma
Keyer
Menu
Selections
Page 2-82
Page 2-30
Section 3
External Interface
Chroma Keyer
Effect
Switcher
R
Editor
Enable
GPI
Enable
Periph
Enable
Effect
Config
Picture
Mixer
Config
M/E
Mode
Y
M
B
Frame Store
G
Panel
Setup
Picture
Frame
Keyer
C
hroma
Key
Shadow
On
Background
C
M/E 2
M/E 1
Sec
Wash
Sec
Effect
Oper
Key/
Stencil
Status
Wipe
Horizontal Vertical Opacity
Position Position
Wash
Shadow
O
n
Hue/
Softness
Freeze
Grab
Field
1
Field
2
Flat
Matte
Matte 2
E-MEM
Key
Frame
View
Shadow
Opacity
Selectivity
Auto
Setup
Video
Store
Key
Store
Run
Control
Input/
Output
Mask
Matte
Bkgd
Supr
Saturation/
Graphic
Display
Path
Aux
Bus
Frame
Store
Chroma
Lum
M/E 2
Floppy
Disk
Drive
Bkgd
1
Bkgd
2
M/E 1
Key
M/E 1
Key
M/E 2
Key
Clear
Menu
Disk
Misc
1
2
1
Key
2
Brightness
Page 2-86
Aux 1-4 Effects Send Only
Pvw
Aux
M/E 1 M/E 1 M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 2
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Bkgd
Shift
M/E 1 M/E 2
A
Key 1 Key
2
A
Key 1
1
2
3
4
2
3
Pgm
Pgm
Preview/
Mask/Aux
Bus
Transition
Effect
Effect
Effect
Key
Key
Key
1
2
Uncal
Uncal
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Bkgd
Shift
Shift
Shift
Key
1
Bkgd
B
Bkgd
Key
2
Key
Priority
1
2
3
4
2
3
A
Page 2-87
On
On
On
On
A
B
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Bkgd
Layered
Over
Over
Uncal
Uncal
1
2
3
4
2
3
Wipe
Preset
Black
Mix
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Bkgd
1
2
3
4
2
3
Cut
Auto
Tran
60
GF 1 GF 2 TK 1 RTD1 GF 2
Transition
Uncal
Effect
Key
A
Key
Key
1
2
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Bkgd
Shift
Shift
Shift
M/E 1
M/E 1
M/E 1
1
2
3
4
2
3
Bkgd
Bkgd
A
B
Uncal
On
On
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Bkgd
Layered
Uncal
1
2
3
4
2
3
Mix
Cut
Wipe
B
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Bkgd
Uncal
1
2
3
4
2
3
Auto
Tran
Transition
Areas
Page 2-12
Source Selection
Page 2-4
Figure 2-1. Control Panel
2-2
Menu
Display
Wipe
Area
Mask
Area
Page 2-65
Section 3
Page 2-73
Mask
Wipe
User
User
User
1
3
5
User
User
User
2
4
6
Soft
Top/Gain
Symmetry Softness
Border
Aspect
Left
Right
Opacity
Width
Menu
Random
Texture
User
Wipe
Undo
Learn
User
Wipe
Bottom/Clip
Force
Mask
Inhibit
Mask
Mask
Invert
Preset Size Aspect
Rotate
Pos
Rotate
Speed
Rotate
Mag
Normal
Reverse
Flip
Flop
Split
H
Multi
V
Multi
Pos
Norm
Pos
Auto
Box
Pri
Wipe
Sec
Wipe
Mask
Bus
Rotate
Rotation Type
Wipe Direction
Pattern Modifiers
Positioner
Pattern
Mix
M/E 1
Pri
M/E 1
Sec
M/E 2
Pri
M/E 2
Sec
M/E 1
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 2
Key
1
Key
2
Key
1
Key
2
Model 2200
Exit
Pattern Mix
Delegate
Preview Only
Bus Delegate
2
M/E 2
Key 2
Pvw
Aux
4
Aux
5
M/E 1 M/E 2
Pvw
Mask Aux
1
Aux
2
Aux
3
Freeze
Video
Freeze
Key
Near
Side
Far
Side
Pvw
Positioner
Area
Keyer
Matte
Pri
Sec
Normal
Border
Shadow
Extrude
Outline
Source
Target
World
Camera
Axis
Lock
Wipe
Wash
Wipe
Wash
Stop
Next
KF
Page 2-64
Borderline
Size/Position
Hue/
Rotate
Spin
Locate
3D
Size/
Locate
Knob
Control
Invert
Inhibit
Mask
Force
Mask
Show
Key
Key
Over
Matte 2
Softness
Flat
Hold
Input
Matte
Locate
Axis
Video
Fill
Matte
Fill
Split
Key
Video
Key
Auto
Select
Key
Borderline
Opacity
Reverse
Rewind
Run
K1 Fill
K2 Fill
K1 Border
K2 Border
Sec Wipe
Saturation/
Offset
Linear
Key
Lum
Key
C
hroma
Pri
Preset
Pattern
Sec
Preset
Pattern
Pri Wipe
Skew
X
Persp
Y
Aspect
Z
Post
Xform
C
han 1
C
han 2
Global
Camera
Key
Model 2200-2i
Use
Gain
Clip
Matte
Select
Key
On
Bkgd
B
Bkgd
A
Key
2
Key
1
Center
M/E 1
Pri
M/E 1
Sec
M/E 2
Pri
M/E 2
Sec
Brightness
Run Control
Keyer
Matte
E-MEM
Effect
Effect
Shadow
Extrude
Invert
Outline
Pri
Sec
Auto
Recall
Auto
Run
Clear
Work
Buffer
Const
Dur
Normal
Border
Prev
Next
Wipe
Wash
Wipe
Wash
1345804-42224438
Borderline
Key
1
Key
2
Key
Priority
Size/Position
Hue/
Chan 1
M/E 1
M/E 2
Lock
Get
Put
Inhibit
Mask
Force
Mask
Show
Key
Enable
All
+ / ---
Cut
Go To
KF
Go To
Time
Key
Over
Softness
Flat
Matte
Matte 2
7
4
1
8
5
2
0
9
Learn
On
Over
On
Over
Chan 2
Misc
Bkgd
Seq
Bank
0
1
Copy
Video
Fill
Matte
Fill
Split
Key
Video
Key
Auto
Select
Key
KF
Dur
Effect
Dur
Borderline
Opacity
K1 Fill
K2 Fill
K1 Border
K2 Border
Sec Wipe
6
Preset
Black
Saturation/
Offset
Pri Wipe
Global
Dis
Bank
Time
Cursor
Mark
Cursor
Paste
Mark
Insert
Before
Linear
Key
Lum
Key
C
hroma
Pri
Preset
Pattern
Sec
Preset
Pattern
3
Key
Gain
Clip
Trim
Camera
Key
On
Bkgd
B
Bkgd
A
Key
2
Matte
Select
Undo
Tran
Rate
Mark
Block
Modify
Insert
After
Key
1
.
Enter
60
Bank
Brightness
Enables
Edit
Keyer
Areas
Page 2-21
Matte
Areas
Page 2-33
Effects Memory
(E-MEM)
Area
Page 2-36
2-3
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Source Selection
The Source Select portion of the control panel consists of Primary
source select buttons, Secondary (re-entry) source select buttons,
SHIFT buttons, and Key Bus delegation and uncalibrated
indicators. (Figure 2-2.) Each vertical column of buttons has the
same input; each horizontal row is an output. An input is put on
an output by pressing the button on that output row that has the
required input. Each input can be named; the first four letters of
the name are displayed in the LED panel located between the
M/ E rows.
Pvw
Aux
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Bkgd
Shift
M/E 1 M/E 2
1
2
3
4
2
3
Pgm
Pgm
Key
Key 1
Key 2
Uncal
Uncal
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Bkgd
Shift
Shift
Shift
1
2
3
4
2
3
A
B
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Bkgd
Uncal
Uncal
1
2
3
4
2
3
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Bkgd
1
2
3
4
2
3
GF 1 GF 2 TK 1 RTD1 GF 2
Uncal
Key 1
Key 2
Uncal
Key
A
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Bkgd
Shift
Shift
Shift
M/E 1
M/E 1
M/E 1
1
2
3
4
2
3
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Bkgd
Uncal
1
2
3
4
2
3
B
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Bkgd
Uncal
1
2
3
4
2
3
Figure 2-2. Source Select Panel
2-4
Source Selection
All buttons in the Source Select region have three levels of
illumination:
■
■
■
OFF indicates not selected;
DIM or “low tally” indicates selected, but not on-air;
BRIGHT or “high tally” indicates selected and on-air.
Only one button in each row is illuminated at any time.
Primary Source Selection (Primary Crosspoints)
The Source Select Buttons are used to select which of the
inputs into the switcher will be used in the switcher.
Each row of primary source selection buttons consists of
16 buttons. Each can have a designator under a clear
lens cap.
Black
Color
. . . Bkgd
Each input, including internally generated signals such as black
and background, can be mapped to any vertical column of
crosspoint buttons. Thus, each column of buttons may be
visualized as an input bus of video or key crosspoints. Each input
can be treated as either a video signal or a key signal, as defined
in the Configuration menu.
The input signals on each input column can be placed on any
output bus (horizontal row) by pressing the crosspoint button at
the intersection of the column and row. Any video/ key input may
be selected on any number of output buses; however each output
bus can have only one output signal selected on it at one time.
The SHIFT button located at the right end of each primary source
selection row is used to access inputs 17 through 32. To select a
shifted input, hold SHIFT down (button lamp comes on) and press
a crosspoint button on that bus. The SHIFT button lamp then
remains lit to show that the selection is a shifted selection. The
Shift mode will turn off when an unshifted selection is made on
that bus.
Shift
2-5
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Crosspoint Button Caution Indication
A primary crosspoint button may flash if the timing of a selected
input cannot be corrected by the automatic input timing circuit.
This flashing can be disabled through the Configuration menu.
Secondary Source Selection (Re-entry Crosspoints)
The secondary source (“M/ E re-entry”) buttons, M/E 1 are located
at the right of each row of M/ E 2 primary crosspoint buttons. The
program output of M/ E 1 may be re-entered as an input on an
M/ E 2 bus by selecting this button as the input.
M/E 1
Key Delegation and Uncal Indicators
Each M/ E has a two key buses but only one row of key bus
buttons. The keyer bus buttons are delegated to each key bus by
pressing the key 1 or key 2 button in the keyer subpanel for that
M/ E.
The KEY 1 and KEY 2 indicator LEDs, are located at the right of
each row of keyer crosspoint buttons and light to indicate which
keyer the row of buttons is currently delegated to control.
Key 1
Key 2
2-6
Source Selection
Each UNCAL indicator LED, located to the right of each row of
primary crosspoint buttons, lights if one or more of the following
variables are set to non-default values for the selected crosspoint
coring, or horizontal key position.
Uncal
LED Display
The Led displays the first four letters of the input name. The
inputs are named using the Name File Menu on page 3-138
Holding down the shift button causes the LEDs to display the
name of inputs 17 through 32.
2-7
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Auto Delegation
Panel Delegation
Some of the controls on the Model 2200 Switcher are delegated to
other controls under conditional control of the operator or system.
delegation is that pressing a button on one subpanel may activate
the controls on another subpanel of the control panel. For
example, the single chroma keyer subpanel is used for controlling
all chroma keyers, and is activated by pressing the CHR KEY
button on either of the M/ E Keyer subpanels. Auto delegation is
normally on, but can be turned off via the User Preferences menu.
Table 2-1 shows some of the delegations present in the Model 2200
Switcher.
Table 2-1. Panel Delegation
Conditions and
Comments
Subanel
Button Pressed
Delegated Subpanel
Transition
KEY 1 or KEY 2
Keyer, Key Bus
(same M/E)
Mask
INHibit MASK or
FORCE MASK must be
on
Chroma Keyer
CHR KEY must be on
Transition
BKGD B or BKGD A
Keyer (same M/E)
(Layered Mode)
Transition
WIPE
Wipe
AUX/Mask/PVW
Bus
Any PREVIEW ONLY
Crosspoint
Preview Bus
Keyer
KEY 1 or KEY 2
Key Bus (same M/E)
Mask
INHibit MASK or
FORCE MASK must be
on
Chroma Keyer
CHR KEY must be on
2-8
Auto Delegation
Table 2-1. Panel Delegation - (continued)
Conditions and
Comments
Subanel
Button Pressed
Delegated Subpanel
Keyer
PRI PST PTTN or SEC
PST PTTN
Wipe
Keyer
Keyer
CHR KEY
Chroma Keyer
Mask
INHibit MASK or
FORCE MASK
INHibit MASK or
FORCE MASK button
must be turned on by the
press
Keyer
Keyer
Matte
Any Borderline mode
button except NORMal
Matte (same M/E)
Matte (same M/E)
Wipe Matte*
Lights K1 BORD or K2
BORD indicator in matte
subpanel, depending on
Keyer delegation
MATTE FILL
Lights K1 FILL or K2
FILL indicator on Matte
subpanel, depending on
keyer delegation
PRI WIPE WASH or
SEC WIPE WASH
If Wipe BORDER is on
E-MEM
Mask
Register Recall
Keyer and Key Bus
Wipe
PRI WIPE or SEC
WIPE
Wipe
BORDER
Matte (same M/E)
BORDer button must be
turned on by the press
Lights PRI WIPE or SEC
WIPE indicator on matte
subpanel
*In an M/E Matte Subpanel: Pressing the PRI WIPE WASH button causes the Wipe Subpanel to be
auto delegated to the primary wipe pattern generator for the calling M/E. Pressing the SEC WIPE
WASH button in the M/E Matte Subpanel causes the Wipe Subpanel to be auto delegated to the
secondary wipe pattern generator for the calling M/E.
2-9
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Menu Delegation (DPOPs)
The Model 2200 also delegates some menus on the Menu Display
screen to open when specific buttons on the panel are double-
pressed. (The second press must occur within a half a second)
Table 2-2 lists the buttons that support this function.
NOTE: An opened menu is delegated, where appropriate, to the button
that opened the menu. For example, double-pressing the KEY 1 delegation
button on the M/E 1 Keyer panel causes the keyer menu to open and the
menu controls to be delegated to keyer 1 of M/E 1.
Table 2-2. Menu Delegation
Subpanel
Button Double-Pressed
Delegated Menu
Transition
WIPE
Wipe Pattern menu
Keyer menu
Keyer (any M/E)
KEY 1 and KEY 2
Keyer (any M/E)
(Layered Mode)
BKGD B, BKGD A, KEY 1, and
KEY 2
Keyer menu
Keyer (any M/E)
PRI PST PTTN or SEC PST
PTTN
Wipe menu
CHR KEY
Chroma Key menu
Chroma Key menu
Chroma Keyer
Frame Store
M/E 1 KEY 1 through
M/E 2 KEY-2 on 3000-2 or
through M/E 3 KEY 3 on 3000-3
VIDEO STORE, or KEY STORE
Frame Store menu
2-10
Auto Delegation
Table 2-2. Menu Delegation - (continued)
Subpanel
Button Double-Pressed
Delegated Menu
Wipe
Wipe Pattern MENU
Wipe Pattern menu
Wipe Modifiers menu
M/E 1 PRI through M/E 2 SEC
on 3000-2 or through M/E 3 SEC
on 3000-3
Wipe PatternTEXTURE
Wipe Texture menu
Crosspoint Source
Select
SHIFT
User Preference
menu
Mask
INH MASK or MASK BUS
Mask menu
2-11
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Transition Subpanels
The transition subpanels are used to select the type of transition
and to execute the transition. There is a transition subpanel for
each M/ E. (See Figures 2-3 and 2-4.)
Transition
Effect
Effect
Effect
Key
Key
Key
Bkgd
Bkgd
Priority
1
2
B
A
On
On
On
On
Layered
Over
Over
Preset
Black
Wipe
Mix
Auto
Tran
Cut
60
Figure 2-3. M/E 1 Transition Subpanel
Transition
Effect
Effect
Effect
Key
Key
Priority
Bkgd
Bkgd
Key
2
B
A
1
On
On
On
On
Layered
Over
Over
Preset
Black
Wipe
Mix
Auto
Tran
Cut
60
Figure 2-4. M/E 2 Transition Subpanel
2-12
Transition Subpanels
Next Transition Buttons
The five next transition buttons – BKGD b, BKGD a, KEY 1, KEY 2,
and KEY PRIORity – select the output signals that will change
during the next transition.
An ON indicator located beneath each next transition button is lit
when the associated signal is an active part of the M/ E output in
layered mode.
On
NOTE: The way the Next Transition buttons operate depends on
whether the M/E is operating in Standard Mode or in Layered Mode. The
mode of operation is set in the M/E MODE menu, described in section 3.
Next Transition Buttons (Standard Mode)
In Standard Mode, only the BKGD A, KEY 1, KEY 2, and KEY
PRIORity next transition buttons and the ON and OVER indicators
below the KEY buttons are functional. (The BKGD B button and
the ON indicators below the BKGD buttons are not functional and
the LAYERED indicator is not lit.)
The transition can affect Background only, Key 1 only, Key 2 only,
or any combination of those. Multiple-layer transitions are
selected by simultaneously pressing more than one button.
Pressing BKGD A selects background video to change during the
next transition. That is, the background video output of the M/ E
will change from the source selected on the A Background bus to
the source selected on the B Background bus.
Bkgd
A
At the end of the transition, the inputs selected on the back-
ground buses will interchange, or “flip-flop.” The “new video” on
the B Background bus will transfer to the A Back-ground bus, and
the “old video” on the A Background bus will transfer to the B
Background bus.
2-13
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Activating the KEY 1 or KEY 2 button (lamp lit) causes the next
transition to bring on or remove the selected key. Selecting KEY 1
or KEY 2 delegates the keyers subpanel and KEY bus to the
selected keyer so that the characteristics of the selected key may be
adjusted (see keyer subpanel description).
Key
1
Key
2
One or both of the KEY buttons can be activated at the same time
and one or both keys can be on (ON indicator lit) at the same time.
Pressing KEY PRIORity causes the next transition to swap the Key
1/ Key 2 priority. This can be performed as a mix, wipe, or cut
transition. Key priority always involves both Key 1 and Key 2
Key
Priority
The OVER indicators lights when that key is over the other key.
Over
The effect indicators light when the associated key or video is in
the effects send mode.
Effect
Next Transition Buttons (Layered Mode)
In Layered Mode, all of the next transition buttons and indicators
are functional and the LAYERED indicator is lit. In this mode,
BKGD B and BKGD A are keyers.
Layered
The transition can affect Background A only, Background B only,
Key 1 only, Key 2 only, or any combination of these. Multiple-
layer transitions can be selected by simultaneously pressing more
than one button.
NOTE: Flip-flop operation occurs only when operating in Standard
mode. Operating in layered mode causes the A and B Background layers
to transition in a manner similar to the Key 1 and Key 2 layers (see the
descriptions for Key 1 and Key 2).
In Layered mode, the BKGD A and BKGD B buttons also delegate
the keyers subpanel. (The key bus delegation remains unchanged
when the keyer subpanel is delegated to either of the background
layers.)
Bkgd
A
Bkgd
B
2-14
Transition Subpanels
Transition Type Buttons
The type of transition at the next transition is determined by the
WIPE, MIX, and PRESET BLACK buttons.
The WIPE and MIX buttons are mutually exclusive; pressing one
selects it and de-selects the other.
A WIPE transition uses the output of the wipe generator to shape
the selected transition(s). Your selected wipe pattern appears over
the old video/ key and moves across the screen, revealing the new
video/ key as it moves. Use either the lever arm or the AUTOTRANs
button to perform the WIPE transition.
Wipe
Mix
Pressing MIX selects a transition that mixes video, keys or
backgrounds, during the change from one source to the other. A
mix transition gradually fades the new video and/ or key over the
old video and/ or key. You can use either the lever arm or AUTO
TRANs button to perform a MIX transition.
Pressing the PRESET BLACK button selects a two-stage transition
that inserts black between the two video sources being mixed,
wiped, or cut. For example, instead of mixing directly between the
A Background and B Background buses during a background
transition, a preset black transition mixes, wipes, or cuts from the
A Background bus to black. When a second transition is
performed, black mixes, wipes, or cuts, away to the B
Background. After completion of the two transitions, PRESET
BLACK turns itself off automatically.
Preset
Black
In addition to this automatic cancellation, you can toggle PRESET
BLACK on and off manually. If you turn off PRESET BLACK while
the transition is on the black limit, the M/ E output will
immediately switch from black to the original signal. If you turn
off PRESET BLACK when it is off limit, the transition to or from
black will stop.
2-15
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
The PRESET BLACK function is available in each M/ E. PRESET
BLACK affects only the effect where it is selected and not the entire
switcher. The button lights when pressed and turns off
automatically when the second transition is complete. The BLACK
video input button on the A Bus remains lit while the M/ E is on
the black limit. The preview monitor continues to show the final
result of the two-stage preset black transition.
MIX and WIPE are unaffected when PRESET BLACK is turned on.
MIX and WIPE can be changed at any time during a preset black
operation.
Preset Black always fades to a full screen black regardless of
whether the switcher is operating in layered mode or standard
mode.
An abort of Preset Black occurs when the operator selects a
crosspoint on the A Background bus while the M/ E transition is
on the black limit. This abort causes the following to occur: the
preset black transition is cancelled, the PRESET BLACK button
lamp turns off, all keys are dropped, and the selected crosspoint is
taken fully on-air. If the abort occurs in Layered Mode, the M/ E is
forced to Standard Mode to ensure that the selected crosspoint is
a full raster image.
A new background source may be selected on the B Background
bus when you are at the midpoint of a preset black mix. In the
same manner, next-transition delegation buttons, keyer modes, or
keyer sources may also be changed. None of these changes will
abort the preset black transition.
2-16
Transition Subpanels
Configuring the BLACK Crosspoint – When mapping inputs to
pushbuttons, one of the choices in the CONFG menu is BLACK, and
another choice is NONE. Your selection will have an effect on how
PRESET BLACK operates, and what will happen in the event the
controller CPU fails.
Black
When the first transition during a preset black operation is
completed, the left most BLACK crosspoint is automatically
selected on the A Background bus. If black has not been assigned
to any pushbutton, the PRESET BLACK button is disabled and the
preset black function is not permitted. If a pushbutton is assigned
to NONE, black appears when that button is selected; however the
preset black function will not use this as the BLACK crosspoint.
Processor Failure – The BLACK crosspoint is also important in the
situation where the Controller main CPU fails while one of the
M/ Es is performing a re-entry. When it fails, the M/ Es are
required to abandon their re-entry crosspoints and select BLACK
on the same bus. In the case where black was never assigned to a
pushbutton, the M/ E selects the left most crosspoint on the bus.
Transition Controls
You can perform a transition using any of three different controls:
the lever arm, the AUTO TRANs button, or the CUT button.
Auto
Trans
Cut
The lever arm is used to perform manual transitions. Moving
the lever arm from one limit to the other always performs a
complete transition.
Using the lever arm, it is possible to start a transition, stop it at
any point, reverse it, and even return to the original limit,
without completing the transition. The arrows at the top and
bottom of the lever arm travel lights to indicate the direction
that the lever arm has to move to complete the transition.
2-17
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
You can use the lever arm in combination with the AUTO
TRANs button to perform a transition. You can start the
transition by moving the lever arm off its limit, and finish the
transition by pressing AUTO TRANs. The transition is
completed at a rate proportional to the rate set for a full AUTO
TRANs transition. For example, if the lever arm is moved
halfway and the transition is completed by pressing AUTO
TRANs at a rate of 200 frames, the remaining half of the
transition will take 100 frames.
NOTE: The lever arm will be left off-limit any time you begin a
transition with the lever arm and finish it with AUTOTRANs. The lever
arm will not function properly again until is moved to either limit (this
action will not change the M/E output). While the lever arm is non-
functional, both lever arm direction indicators are on.
2-18
Transition Subpanels
Pressing CUT cannot, however, complete a transition begun with
the lever arm. In this case, CUT reverses the inputs during the
background transitions. During key transitions, it changes the
logic state of the key.
E-MEM recall operations result in another set of conditions for
lever arm transitions. When an E-MEM recall places a transition at
a point different from the actual position of the lever arm, the lever
arm becomes inactive until it is moved to catch up with the
transition. For example, assume the lever arm is on a limit and an
E-MEM recall puts the transition at some midpoint. In such a case,
the lever arm would be inoperative until you moved it far enough
to catch up with the transition. At that point, you could use the
lever arm to complete the transition or return it to the beginning
limit. (Or, you could press AUTO TRANs to complete the
transition). Another example of use with E-MEM is a case where
the lever arm is off limit and an E-MEM recall puts the transition
on a limit. In this instance, both lever direction lights would be lit,
indicating the lever arm is inoperative. Moving the lever arm to
either limit will turn the direction lights off and reactivate the
lever arm. (You could also use AUTO TRANs to resume the
transition since auto transitions continue to function even when
the lever arm is inoperative.)
Pressing the AUTO TRANs button starts an automatic S-
linear transition at the rate displayed on the LEDs next to
the button.
Auto
Trans
060
2-19
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
You can specify a transition rate by entering a value from Ø to 999
frames on the numeric keypad in the effects memory subpanel. A
zero frame transition is equivalent to a cut. (Refer to the effects
memory subpanel description later in this section for further
information on setting the rate.) The lamp in the AUTO TRANs
button remains lit for the duration of the transition.
Pressing AUTOTRANs a second time during a transition, stops the
transition at the current point. The transition can be completed by
pressing the button a third time or by moving the lever arm to its
opposite limit. The lever arm becomes active when it catches up
with the auto transition in progress. Pressing the CUT button
leaves the transition where it stopped but reverses the two videos
or the logic state of a key. Similarly, you can start a transition by
using the lever arm and complete it by pressing the AUTO TRANs
button. However, performing a transition in such a manner leaves
the lever arm off limit.
Pressing the CUT button causes an immediate transition. The M/ E
Cut
output changes instantaneously.
2-20
Keyer Areas
The keyer areas are used to set up the keyers. There is one keyer
subpanel for each M/ E each of these can be delegated to each of
the keyers in that M/ E. (See Figure 2-5.) The keyer areas provide
control over the following features for it’s M/ E:
■
■
Key masking
Video key type selection — preset pattern, chroma key,
luminance key, or linear key.
■
Key fill: matte or video fill
Keyer
Shadow
Extrude
Invert
Outline
Normal
Border
Borderline
Size/Position
Show
Key
Inhibit
Mask
Force
Mask
Key
Over
Split
Key
Video
Fill
Matte
Fill
Video
Key
Auto
Select
Key
Borderline
Opacity
Lum
Key
Linear
Key
Chroma
Key
Pri
Preset
Pattern
Sec
Preset
Pattern
Gain
Clip
Bkgd
Bkgd
Key
On
Key
Key
B
A
2
1
Figure 2-5. Keyers Subpanel
■
Key source: video key or auto-selection of key signals based
on user preferences Show key
■
■
■
■
Borderline settings
Key invert
Key priority
Clip and Gain
2-21
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Keyer Delegation Buttons
The keyer delegation buttons select which of the keyers is being
changed. In normal mode, the Keyer Subpanel, located in each
M/ E row, can be delegated between Key 1 and Key 2.
Key
1
Key
2
In layered mode, four keyers are available –
Key 1, Key 2, Background B, and Background
A.
Bkgd
A
Key
1
Key
1
Bkgd
B
KEY ON Indicator
The key oN indicator lamp lights when the delegated keyer is in
use. This indicator is a logical AND of the ON indicator in the
transition subpanel and the keyer delegation selection.
Key
On
Key Type Buttons
The second row of buttons from the
bottom of each keyer subpanel selects
one of five keyer modes.
Pri
Preset
Pattern
Sec
Preset
Pattern
Chroma
Lum
Key
Key
Linear
Key
Pressing the LINEAR KEY button selects a linear key with a gain
fixed at unity, clip fixed at 50%, and no S-shaping. The LINEAR
KEY button lamp (only) is illuminated when linear key is selected
on the delegated keyer.
Linear
Key
If a linear key is desired, but the key signal is not at the correct
level, adjustments can be made with the (CLIP) and (GAIN) knobs.
(CLIP) adjusts the offset of the key signal (over a small range) in
linear key mode. (GAIN) adjusts the amplitude of the key signal
(over a small range).
Clip
Gain
2-22
Keyer Areas
If either knob is adjusted away from unity, the LUM KEY button
lights in addition to the LINear KEY button lamp. Both buttons
illuminated indicates to the operator that a linear key is being
performed with non-unity gain and/ or clip. If the key memory
feature is enabled in a software menu, the non-unity setting is
recalled whenever the input associated with this setting is
selected.
When gain and clip are returned to unity, the LUM KEY button
lamp goes off. Since it is difficult to adjust the knobs back to exact
unity, the unity values can be forced by pressing the LIN KEY
button a second time while it is lit. This action restores unity and
turns off the LUM KEY button lamp.
The LUM KEY button selects a luminance key that has variable clip
and gain adjustment and S-shaping of the key signal. Key (CLIP)
(offset) and (GAIN) (amplitude) settings are remembered for each
source. Six Clip and Gain values are saved: three for the video key
and three for the Auto Select button (LUM, CHROMA KEY, and
LINEAR).
Lum
Key
A menu selection is available that switches a chroma trap into the
key path to remove unwanted chroma from video used for
keying.
Pressing the CHROMA KEY button delegates the chroma keyer
subpanel to that M/ E. (The CHROMA KEY button is functional
only when the chroma keyer option is installed.) Refer to the
chroma keyer subpanel description later in this section for details
on chroma keyer operation. CHROMA KEY does not function with
background keyers (layered mode).
Chroma
Key
Pressing the Primary Preset Pattern PRI PRESET PATTERN button
selects the output of the primary (transition) wipe generator as the
key source. Pattern adjustment is done in the wipe subpanel (see
the wipe subpanel description later in this section for details). The
key (CLIP) and (GAIN) knobs are non-functional when this mode is
selected.
Pri
Preset
Pattern
2-23
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
In the signal path through the Model 2200 switcher, keys,
including preset patterns, occur before the effect send crosspoints.
This allows any key, including a preset pattern, to be sent to an
external digital video effects device via an effects send. Transition
wipes, however, occur after the effects send crosspoints.
After pressing the PRI PST PTTN function the SPLIT KEY indicator
is turned off.
NOTE: Double-pressing the PRI PST PTTN or SEC PST PTTN button in
the keyer subpanel opens up a menu that allows you to set the preset
pattern wipe direction. A single press of either the PRI PST PTTN or the
SEC PST PTTN button auto delegates the wipe subpanel.
Sec
Preset
Pattern
Pressing the SEC PRESET PATTERN (Secondary Preset Pattern)
button selects the optional secondary wipe generator as the key
source. Operation of the keyer while SEC PRESET PATTERN is
selected is similar to that when PRI PRESET PATTERN is selected.
The secondary wipe generator option provides wipe pattern
selection independent of the primary wipe generator. When the
secondary wipe option is not installed, only the secondary preset
pattern edge attributes are independent (preset size, softness, soft
symmetry, border width, border matte, border opacity, and
normal/ reverse).
All pattern controls are present on the wipe subpanel and wipe
menus. Refer to the wipe subpanel description, later in this
section, for a discussion of these controls.
Primary and Secondary Preset Patterns can be used with all
keyers in layered mode.
The VIDEO FILL and MATTE FILL buttons determine whether the
key is filled with key bus video or a locally generated matte. These
buttons are mutually exclusive, one of the two buttons is always
active and illuminated.
Matte
Fill
Video
Fill
VIDEO FILL and MATTE FILL operate independently from the key
source buttons. All keyer modes except the A and B keyers
operate with either video or matte fill.
2-24
Keyer Areas
When the key bus is contributing to the switcher Program output,
pressing MATTE FILL does not low tally the key bus, even though
the key fill video is not visible.
Video fill mode operates with background keyers in layered
mode. When the keyer is delegated to a background layer, the
VIDEO FILL button is turned on automatically (MATTE FILL is
turned off).
Key Source Buttons
The VIDEO KEY and AUTO SELECT KEY buttons determine the
source of the key.
Auto
Select
Key
Video
Key
Pressing the VIDEO KEY button forces derivation of the key from a
video source. The “video source” is the video selected on the key
bus (for keyers 1 and 2) or on the background bus (for background
keyers in layered mode only).
If VIDEO KEY and VIDEO FILL are both selected, the result is a self-
key.
Pressing VIDEO KEY while in Chroma Key mode causes an
encoded chroma key, using the fill video as the source for the
encoded chroma keyer.
Pressing the AUTO SEL KEY button forces the key to be derived
from a user-defined source.
Auto
Select
Key
User preferences selected in the Configuration/ User Preferences
menu determine whether a luminance or linear key is a self-key or
an external key (and determine which external key is used). They
also specify whether chroma keys are encoded or analog
component (YUV, BETA, MII, or RGB).
2-25
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Split Key Operation
A Split Key uses any key source other than a key derived from the
key fill (self key) or a key source pre-selected in user preferences
or a preset pattern. All other key sources can be used in a Split
Key. A Split Key can be used in all keyers, and in either standard
or layered mode.
A Split Key is set up by first selecting the key fill source on the Key
bus, then holding down the VIDEO KEY button or the AUTO
SELECT button while pressing a second button on the key bus.
The second source provides the key signal. For AUTO SELECT that
key is the external key signal mapped to that column of crosspoint
buttons; for VIDEO KEY the key is the video signal mapped to that
column of crosspoints. Pressing a lit video key or Auto Select Key
button will illuminate the key source crosspoint.
When a split key is operational with an auto select key or a video
key, the SPLIT KEY indicator is lit.
Split
Key
Other Key Modifier Buttons
Pressing KEY OVER swaps the priority of the two keyers, KEY 1
Key
Over
and KEY 2.The KEY OVER button lights when the keyer subpanel
is delegated to the key that is over the other. It may be pressed
whether or not either keyer is on-air.
In Layered mode, the KEY OVER button does not light if the keyer
subpanel is delegated to either background keyer, but the button
still controls the priority of Keyers 1 and 2. It does not affect the
priority of the background keyers, which have a fixed priority of
background A over background B.
2-26
Keyer Areas
One of the two key OVER indicators on the associated transition
subpanel is always on, indicating the priority of the Keyers 1 and
2. The indicator is on regardless of the on-air status of either keyer.
Over
The INVert toggle button inverts the polarity of the key source.
Inversion is applied to the incoming key source before key
processing is applied. INVert operates in all keyers in layered
mode.
Invert
The SHOW KEY button is used for viewing the key signal on a
particular keyer. This button does not affect the on-air video.
When held down, the switched preview bus output shows the key
signal from the keyer currently delegated to the keyer subpanel.
The key signal displayed is the key after clipping, masking, and
chroma trapping have taken place.
Show
Key
The SHOW KEY button does not affect the program output of the
M/ E and operates in all keyers in layered mode.
Borderline Controls
The buttons at the top of the keyer
subpanel control the Borderline option.
The NORMal, BORDer, SHadow, EXtrude,
and OUTLINE buttons are
Normal
Border
Shadow
Extrude Outline
interlocked; only one button can be active at a time.
NOTE: The background keyers (layered mode) do not have Borderline
capability.
Border, Shadow, and Extrude modes operate with video or matte
filled keys. The Borderline matte is separate from the fill matte
and has its own delegate button in the matte subpanel.
The Borderline matte is adjusted in the matte subpanel after
selecting K1 BORD or k2 BORD, as appropriate, with the MATTE
SELect delegation button.
Normal
The NORMal button turns Borderline off.
2-27
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
The BORDer button turns on symmetrical Borderline mode. The
border width may be one, two, or three video lines wide, as
Border
adjusted by the (borderline SIZE/POSition) control.
The SHadow button turns on Shadow mode. The (borderline
SIZE/POSition) knob is used to adjust the shadow width and
position from one-to-six lines down and to the right or left.
Shadow
The EXtrude button operates like SHadow except that the shape of
the shadow is different. The (borderline SIZE/POSition) knob is
used to adjust the shadow width and position from one-to-six
lines down and to the right or left.
Extrude
Outline
Pressing the OUTLINE button produces an outline of the key
signal. The border width is adjustable to one, two, or three lines
with the (Borderline SIZE/POSition) knob. In Outline mode, there
is no fill video or fill matte; only the background video and outline
border matte are output. As a result, the VIDEO FILL and MATTE
FILL buttons have no effect when OUTLINE is active.
The Borderline (Borderline SIZE/POSition) knob adjusts the width
of all Borderline borders. The control also moves the shadow or
extruded shadow either down to the left or down to the right.
Borderline
Size/Position
The Borderline (Borderline OPACITY) knob adjusts the
transparency of the Borderline borders.
Borderline
Opacity
2-28
Keyer Areas
Auto Preview Operation
In normal operation, the switched preview output of the system
may be set to monitor any of the M/ E preview outputs, preview
output, or preview primary bus.
The Auto Preview feature is activated by pressing one of the keyer
delegate buttons (KEY 1, KEY 2, BKGD B, or BKGD A) for 1/ 2
second or longer. When Auto Preview is active, the delegated key
is inserted over the M/ E preview output so that you may preview
the key setup on the switched preview bus.
Holding down a keyer delegate button or turning the (CLIP)
and/ or (GAIN) controls prolongs the Auto Preview mode. The
preview returns to normal after the delegate button is no longer
held down and there is no activity on the (CLIP) or (GAIN) controls
for a user-defined period of time. (User preferences are described
in Section 2 of this manual.)
Mask Control
Pressing inhibit MASK inhibits the key from being displayed
wherever the mask is present. Pressing FORCE MASK causes the
key to be fully turned on where the mask is present, rather than
suppressing the key. (Normally, the mask generator is used to
define areas of the screen where the key is inhibited.) FORCE
MASK is not intended for use with shaped video.
Force
Mask
Inhibit
Mask
The INHibit MASK and FORCE MASK toggle buttons are
illuminated when turned on, and can be turned on individually or
together.
When either button is pressed, the masks subpanel is
automatically delegated for adjusting the correct mask, if auto
delegation is enabled.
The INHibit MASK and FORCE MASK buttons are inoperative for
preset pattern keys. The background keyers (layered mode) do
not have mask capabilities and the mask buttons are inoperative
when the subpanel is delegated to a background keyer.
2-29
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Chroma Keyer Subpanel
The basic Chroma Keyer option consists of a Chroma Key Carrier
Module for each M/ E, providing two chroma keyers per M/ E.
With this option installed, a chroma key may be done using any
4:2:2 crosspoint signal on the M/ E key bus as a source. For
external component video sources, an optional dual Chroma Key
Input Module can be added, this provides two component video
sources.
With a Chroma Keyer option installed in one or both M/ Es, the
information contained in a video picture. User control of chroma
keying is provided by the chroma keyers subpanel (Figure 2-6)
and the (CLIP) and (GAIN) controls on the keyer subpanel.
In addition to the controls provided on the chroma keyers
subpanel, several chroma keyer controls are provided via the
menu display. These are described here and in the menu
descriptions under Chroma Key Menu on page 3-65
Chroma Keyer
R
M
B
Y
G
C
Shadow
On
Shadow
Opacity
Selectivity
Lum
Auto
Setup
Bkgd
Supr
Chroma
M/E 1
Key 1
M/E 1
Key 2
M/E 2
Key 1
M/E 2
Key 2
Figure 2-6. Chroma Keyers Subpanel
2-30
Chroma Keyer Subpanel
Chroma Keyer Delegation
The chroma keyers subpanel may be delegated
between any of the chroma keyers (two per M/ E)
using the four buttons located at the bottom of
the subpanel.
M/E 1
Key 1
M/E 2
Key 2
M/E 1
Key 2
M/E 2
Key 1
Chroma Keyer Controls
The HUE control sets the color in the chroma key scene from
which the key signal will be derived. The foreground and
background suppress mattes also use this color unless
otherwise set in the menu. The six indicators near the (HUE)
knob indicate the color the knob is currently set to (R=red;
M=magenta; B=blue; C=cyan; G=green; Y=yellow).
R
M
B
Y
G
C
(SELECTIVITY) is used to set the how wide a band of colors are
used to make the key signal.
Selectivity
The Shadow ON button turns the chroma key shadow on or off.
Shadow
On
The (SHADOW OPACITY) control sets the opacity of the chroma key
shadow.
Shadow
Opacity
2-31
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Background suppression removes traces of the chroma key
Bkgd
Supr
background color from the foreground. The BKGD SUPR button
turns background suppression on or off. When suppression is
turned on, the associated control knobs are used to define the
amount of suppression.
The BKGD SUPR (LUM) control adjusts the amount of luminance
subtracted from the background region of the foreground video.
Lum
The BKGD SUPR (CHROMA) control adjusts the amount of
chrominance subtracted from the background region of the
foreground video. This knob will beep when the chroma has been
suppressed to zero (at a linear chroma key location).
Chroma
The CLIP knob in the keyers subpanel also will indicate when the
chroma key has reached a linear level. In terms of the chroma key
this indicates that the foreground part of the scene is just opaque.
Only readjust this setting when parts of the foreground are
transparent where they are picking up background color.
The Auto Setup button causes the switcher to automatically set up
the chroma keyer. To do this press the Auto Setup button. This
causes the chroma keyer to take over the wipe positioner knob
and puts a cross hair on the chroma key layer of the output. Use
the positioner to place the cross hair on the background you wish
to key on and press the Auto Setup key again.
Auto
Setup
2-32
Matte Generators
Matte Generators
The matte generator areas (Figure 2-7) provide controls for
creating and modifying mattes. There is one matte generator
subpanel for each M/ E, each of these areas controls the six mattes
on that M/ E.
Matte
Pri
Wipe
Wash
Sec
Wipe
Wash
Hue/
Softness
Matte 2
Flat
Matte
K1 Fill
K2 Fill
K1 Border
K2 Border
Sec Wipe
Saturation/
Offset
Pri Wipe
Matte
Select
Brightness
Figure 2-7. Matte Subpanel
2-33
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Matte Delegation
Each matte subpanel has a MATTE SELect button used to select
Matte
Select
which of the six matte generators that particular subpanel will
control. Above the MATTE SELECT button are six indicators,
which illuminate to show the current delegation at any given
time. Pressing the MATTE SELLECT button repeatedly cycles the
selection through all six matte generators. Holding the button
down causes it to cycle through the selections automatically until
the button is released. If the Borderline option is not installed in
Key 1 or Key 2, the K1 BORD and/ or K2 BORD selections will be
skipped.
MATTE SELECT Indicators
The six indicator LEDs indicate delegation as follows:
K1 FILL and K2 FILL LEDs – Indicate that the matte subpanel is
delegated to one of the matte generators for a subpanel
determined by the key hole cutter. However, when the keyer is in
Video Fill mode, the matte is not visible. Matte fill is available
with all key types (LIN, LUM, CHR, PST PTTN).
K1 Fill
K2 Fill
K1 Border
K2 Border
Pri Wipe
Sec Wipe
K1 BORDer and K2 BORDer LEDs – Indicate that the matte
subpanel is delegated to a matte generator for adjusting the
characteristics of the key border matte in all Borderline modes.
(See the Keyer Subpanel description for related keyer buttons
BORDer, SHDW, EXTRUDE, and OUTLINE.)
PRI WIPE LED – Indicates delegation of the matte generator for
controlling the transition wipe border matte. The PRI WIPE LED
also indicates that the M/ E matte subpanel is delegated to create
the primary preset pattern border in preset pattern mode. (See the
PRI PST PTTN button description under the Keyer Subpanel
topic.)
SECWIPE LEDs – Indicates that the matte subpanel is delegated to
create the secondary preset pattern border in preset pattern mode
(see the SEC PST PTTN button description under the Keyer
Subpanel topic).
2-34
Matte Generators
Matte Modifier Controls
Four buttons and three control knobs in each matte subpanel
control the characteristics of the delegated background matte.
When a Matte Subpanel is delegated away from a matte generator
the status of the knobs and buttons is remembered
The FLAT MATTE button selects a non-wash matte for the
delegated matte generator. Pressing this button deselects all other
matte mode buttons (MATTE 2, PRI WIPE WASH, and SEC WIPE
WASH on that matte.
Flat
Matte
The MATTE 2 button delegates the matte controls to the second
matte generator when a matte wash is selected. To select a matte
wash, press either PRI WIPE WASH or SEC WIPE WASH on that
matte.
Matte 2
PRIWIPEWASH selects the primary (Transition) wipe generator to
modulate between the two mattes during a wash. Pressing and
holding this button allows you to change the transition softness
with the (HUE/SOFTNESS) knob and the offset (position) with the
(SATURATION/OFFSET) knob.
Pri
Wipe
Wash
SEC WIPE WASH causes the secondary (optional) wipe generator
to be used to modulate between the two mattes in a wash.
Pressing and holding this button allows you to change the
transition softness with the (HUE/SOFTNESS) knob and the offset
(position) with the (SATURATION/OFFSET) knob.
Sec
Wipe
Wash
(HUE/SOFTNESS) knob – Adjusts the hue of the matte. The knob
also adjusts the softness (gain) of the transition between the two
matte generators when you hold down the PRIWIPEWASH or SEC
WIPE WASH, button. Softness is not adjustable while FLAT MATTE
is active.
Hue/
Softness
(SATURATION/OFFSET) knob – Adjusts the color saturation of the
matte. The knob adjusts the offset (position) of the wash
modulation when you hold down the PRIWIPEWASH or SECWIPE
WASH button. Offset is not adjustable while FLAT MATTE is active.
Saturation/
Offset
Brightness
(BRIGHTNESS) knob – Adjusts the color brightness of the matte.
2-35
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Effects Memory Subpanel
The Effects Memory (E-MEM®) Subpanel (Figure 2-8) allows you
to define, store, and recall effects setups. The single, delegated E-
MEM Subpanel contains enable buttons, a keypad with readout,
effect editing buttons, effect run buttons, and a run lever arm.
Stop
Next
KF
Hold
Input
Reverse
Rewind
Run
Run Control
E-MEM
Auto
Recall
Auto
Run
Clear
Work
Buffer
Const
Dur
Prev
Next
1345804-42224438
M/E 1
M/E 2
Chan 1
Chan 2
Global
Lock
Cut
Get
Put
Go To
KF
Go To
Time
Enable
All
+ / ---
8
5
2
0
7
4
1
9
Learn
Bank 0
Bank 1
Misc
Bkgd
Seq
Copy
Paste
Mark
KF
Dur
Effect
Dur
6
Effect
Dis
Timr
Cursor
Mark
Cursor
Insert
Before
3
Trim
Camera
Undo
Modify
Insert
After
Tran
Rate
Mark
Block
.
Enter
Bank
Enables
Edit
Figure 2-8. Effects Memory Subpanel
2-36
Effects Memory Subpanel
E-MEM Registers
Effect setups are stored in E-MEM registers. There is a total of 100
registers, grouped in ten banks of ten registers. Each register
belongs to a specific bank (0 through 9) and has a unique number
(0 through 9) within that bank. For example, register 46 means
bank 4, register 6.
When the system is powered up, the keypad readout comes up
with a “NO CURRENT REG” message.
Effects and Keyframes
An E-MEM “effect” has generally been considered to be whatever
was stored in an E-MEM register. This consisted of the status of
enabled levels of the switcher as set up on the control panel and in
the menus, at the time the E-MEM effect was stored (“learned”).
However, the Model 2200 Switcher is able to store more than one
switcher state (“a keyframe”) on each enabled level in a single E-
MEM register, and to transition, or “run,” between keyframes.
Therefore, a keyframe effect is considered to be a sequence of
keyframes stored in a single E-MEM register.
You may think of an E-MEM effect as being the same as a
keyframe effect, but consisting of a single keyframe on each
enabled level. This mode of operation (single-keyframe effects)
may still be used, and may be preferable to multiple-keyframe
effects in many instances.
Learning Effects
To learn an effect setup into a register, press the following
sequences of buttons in the E-MEM Subpanel:
NOTE: Only areas which are enabled will be learned. For more
information read Enable Buttons on page 2-47.
2-37
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
LeaRN, BANK, bank number, register number
If the next desired register is in the current bank, you may press
just the desired register number.
If the desired bank is 0 or 1, you may substitute BANK 0 or BANK
1 for BANK, bank number in the above sequences.
Recalling Effects
To recall a register, press the following buttons:
NOTE: Only areas which are enabled will be recalled. For more
information read Enable Buttons on page 2-47.
BANK, bank number, register number
When an E-MEM register is recalled, the key memory for any
recalled crosspoint is updated.
During an E-MEM recall, if you don’t want the crosspoint to
change, you can manually hold down the present crosspoint
button while the E-MEM register is recalled. This is referred to as
“crosspoint override,” and If key memory is off at this time, the
video and key crosspoint are held. If key memory is on, the video
and key crosspoint and the current keyer memory state are held.
Crosspoint Override
During an E-MEM recall, if you don’t want the crosspoint on an
individual bus to change, you can manually hold down the
present crosspoint buttons while the E-MEM register is recalled.
This is referred to as “crosspoint override.” When this is done, the
video and key crosspoints are held, and if key memory is on at this
time, the current keyer memory state is also held.
See the HOLD INPUT button description, later in this section, for a
method of holding all sources while E-MEM registers are recalled.
2-38
Effects Memory Subpanel
Keypad with Readout
The E-MEM keypad is used for effect recalls, and serves
as a numerical entry pad for the following buttons:TRAN
RATE, LeaRN, LeaRN SEQ, LOCK, BANK, GET, and PUT.
(The last two of these buttons are located in the E-MEM
effect editing group of buttons.)
1345804-42224438
Lock
+ / ---
8
5
2
0
7
4
1
9
Learn
Bank 0
Seq
6
Pushing a numerical button at any time other than when
preceded by one of the above buttons recalls the
corresponding register within the current bank. To recall
a register in a different bank, enter: BANK, bank number,
register number
Effect
Dis
Bank 1
3
Trim
Undo
Tran
Rate
.
Enter
Bank
The alphanumeric readout at the top of the
E-MEM keypad provides status information
about E-MEM operations and registers.
NO CURRENT REG
During normal learn and recall operations, the current Bank and
Register values are displayed. If the register is locked, there is an
“L” shown at the left end of the display. Other messages on the E-
EMPTY REGS” if no register is available for a LeaRN• or PUT•
operation, and “REG IS LOCKED” if you attempt to put an effect
into a locked register. During gets and puts, the display provides
prompts asking you for the source or destination register.
NOTE: Only areas which are enabled will be recalled. For more
information read Enable Buttons on page 2-47.
It is possible to have two different enabled levels recalled by two
different registers. In this case there are actually two current
registers, but only one can be shown in the display. The existence
of this condition is indicated by a “∆” between the apparent
current bank number and the apparent current register number
(for example, “B0∆REG 04”).
2-39
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
This condition occurs if (with AUTO ReCalL off) you enabled one
level, recalled a register, turned off that enable, turned on another
enable, recalled another register and re-enabled the first level. The
locations of the contributing registers can be determined by
turning on one enable at a time.
↑/BANK is a two-function key that can be used for bank selection
or for accessing “second” functions, that is, LOCK and UNDO.
Pressing the ↑/BANK button delegates the numeric keypad to
single-digit bank selection, and delegates buttons with second
functions to the second function.
Bank
The button lights when pressed, and stays lit until the delegation
is completed. Pressing ↑/BANK a second time also terminates the
delegation.
Refer to the “E-MEM Registers” description for use of the BANK
(second) function button.
LeaRN is used for storing or “learning” the current panel setup in
a register or for learning a register sequence.
Lock
Learn
NOTE: Only areas which are enabled will be learned. For more
information read Enable Buttons on page 2-47.
LeaRN, BANK, bank number, register number
If the next desired register is in the current bank, you may press
just the desired register number.
If the desired bank is 0 or 1, you may substitute BANK 0 or BANK
1 for BANK, bank number in the above sequences.
Refer to the SEQ button description for learning a register
sequence.
2-40
Effects Memory Subpanel
The LOCK function locks a single register. Locking a register
prevents the contents of that register from being changed. To lock
the current register, press the following buttons:
Lock
Learn
Bank
↑, LOCK
When locked, an “L” is displayed at the left end of the
register, press the buttons again:
↑, LOCK
NOTE: You cannot lock an entire E-MEM bank from the subpanel; a
menu selection is provided for this action. See E-MEM Register Menu
on page 3-83
Pressing the BANK 0 button makes Bank 0 the current bank, and
causes buttons 0 through 9 on the keypad to become one-button
recall registers for registers 00 through 09. This button is lit
whenever Bank 0 is the current bank.
Bank 0
Bank 1
Pressing BANK 1 makes Bank 1 the current bank, and causes
buttons 0 through 9 on the keypad to become one-button recall
registers for registers 10 through 19. This button is lit whenever
Bank 1 is the current bank.
ENTER confirms a numerical entry on the keypad, such as for the
following functions: GET, PUT, and TRAN RATE. The ENTER
button lights when pressed.
Trim
Enter
2-41
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
SEQ is used for creating automated register-recall sequences.
Seq
Create sequences with the following buttons and values
(parameters in angle brackets (<...>) are optional):
NOTE: Only areas which are enabled will be recalled. For more
information read Enable Buttons on page 2-47.
SEQ, LRN,
register, <TRAN RATE>, <delay>,
register, <TRAN RATE>, <delay>,
..
...
LRN
The command syntax is defined below.
SEQ and LRN may be pressed in either order to start the
command sequence.
LRN must be pressed again to end the command sequence.
<TRAN RATE> and <DELAY>, in angle brackets, are optional.
(TRAN RATE) enables a user-defined delay to be introduced
between register recalls.
<DELAY> is a 1- to 3-digit number entered on the keypad that
specifies an amount of delay in TV frames. (If the number
entered is a 1- or 2-digit number, the entry must be terminated
by pressing ENTER.
REGISTER is any desired register number, as described
previously (that is, BANK, BANK NUMBER, REGISTER NUMBER).
Create a sequence loop by pressing the first register button as the
last register in the sequence.
2-42
Effects Memory Subpanel
Initiate sequences by pressing the following buttons:
SEQ, register
The sequence starts at the register indicated, and proceeds
through the linked sequence to the last register. If a loop has been
programmed, the sequence loop continues until the SEQ button is
pressed to terminate the sequence.
A sequence loop can be broken by double-pressing a register
button, clearing the sequence link that existed in that register, and
making the invoked register the last register in the sequence.
During a sequence of registers with multiple levels, the SEQ
button will high tally if any of the enabled levels was learned with
a sequence. However, it may be that not all enabled levels are
sequencing.
Different sequence delays may be learned separately into
different enabled levels. Sequence delays on different levels are
completely independent, and thus the sequencing may be
occurring at different times on different levels.
If an E-MEM level is disabled while it is actively sequencing, the
sequence will continue. Turning off the SEQ button will not halt
the sequence, because the sequencing level is not delegated. To
ensure halting all actively running sequences, all E-MEM levels
must be enabled (ENABLe ALL) and then SEQ turned off.
EFFect DIS causes an S-linear transition from the current state to
the next recalled register. The current state may be a setup you
have just done on the control panel or the state resulting from a
register recall.
Effect
Dis
An effects dissolve may be learned into a register, so that recalling
that register will initiate a dissolve to another specified register.
The following button sequence is used to learn a dissolve
(parameters in angle brackets (<...>) are optional):
NOTE: Only areas which are enabled will be learned. For more
information read Enable Buttons on page 2-47.
2-43
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
LeaRN, EFFect DIS, <TRAN RATE, (eff dissolve rate>, (register)
The command syntax is defined below.
LEARN and EFFECT DIS may be pressed in either order to start
the command sequence.
TRAN RATE enables a user-defined effects dissolve rate to be
introduced in the dissolve.
<EFF DISSOLVE RATE> is a 1- to 3-digit number entered on the
keypad that specifies the effects dissolve rate in number of TV
frames. (If the number entered is a 1- or 2-digit number, the
entry must be terminated by pressing ENTER).
REGISTER is any desired register number, as described
previously (that is, BANK, BANK NUMBER, REGISTER NUMBER).
The effects dissolve rate is the same as the auto transition rate
indicated in the readout on the corresponding Transition
Subpanel.
When the register with the learned effects dissolve is recalled, the
EFFect DIS button will high tally until the dissolve is completed,
then will turn off.
During a recall of a register with multiple levels, the EFF DIS
button will high tally if any of the enabled levels contains an
effects dissolve. However, not all enabled levels may be
dissolving.
Different effects dissolve rates may be learned separately into
different enabled levels. The effects dissolve rates on different
levels are completely independent, and thus the dissolves may be
running at different rates on different levels.
2-44
Effects Memory Subpanel
The • (DOT) button is used to represent the next empty register
when used with LeaRN and PUT. (The next empty register is
defined as the next register that is empty on all levels, not just
enabled levels, starting with the current register. (At register 99,
the search for an empty register will wrap around to 0).
Undo
•
LeaRN • learns the current switcher state into the next empty
register, and that register becomes the current register.
PUT • ENTER copies the current register into the next empty
register. The current switcher state is unaffected and the
current register number is unaffected.
GET • ENTER clears out all levels of the current register. The
current switcher state is unaffected and the current register
number is unaffected.
NOTE: If there are no empty registers, the operation will not be done,
an error beep will sound, and the keypad readout shows “NO EMPTY
REGS”
UNDO is used to back out of a recall, LeaRN, PUT, GET, or another
UNDO register operation. The UNDO button lights when pressed,
confirming that it has been pressed. An UNDO must be done
immediately after an undesired operation, otherwise it may not be
able to undo the operation.
Undo
•
Bank
For these register functions, pressing ↑, UNDO repeatedly allows
you to toggle back and forth between the two last states.
(For toggling UNDO, you have to press ↑/BANK then UNDO each
time.)
2-45
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
TRAN RATE is used with the keypad to set the rate used by the
AUTOTRANs (auto transition) button in the transition areas and by
the EFFect DIS button on the E-MEM keypad.
Tran
Rate
When TRAN RATE is pressed, the E-MEM display queries:
SET WHICH RATE?
and any Enable buttons that are on turn off.
The transition rate is then delegated to the desired Transition
Subpanel by pressing M/E 1 or M/E 2. Both of these functions may
be enabled simultaneously by pressing ENABLe ALL.
After enabling the desired levels, the display queries:
AUTO RATE = ?
Enter the desired rate using the numeric buttons on the keypad.
Entering three digits on the keypad automatically enters the rate.
If only one or two digits are entered, the entry must be completed
by pressing ENTER. Rates from zero through 999 frames may be
entered. If one or two digits have been entered, the entry may be
cleared and the previous rate restored by pressing TRAN RATE
again. As soon as the new rate is confirmed, it is displayed in the
auto transition rate display in the delegated transition
subpanel(s).
When the transition rate has been set, the TRAN RATE button turns
off and the Enable buttons return to their previous state, as does
the keypad readout display.
2-46
Effects Memory Subpanel
Enable Buttons
The Enable buttons are located to the left of the keypad in the E-
MEM Subpanel and are used for enabling register levels. Each
register is partitioned into sections (or “levels”) corresponding to
the Enable buttons.
Auto
Recall
Auto
Run
M/E 1
M/E 2
Chan 1
Chan 2
Global
Enable
All
All register manipulation, including learn and recall operations,
affect only the enabled levels. This allows you to build
independent effects on each level and to recall the levels
independently.
Misc
Bkgd
For example, an effect using both M/ E 1 and M/ E 2 could be built
with both being enabled, and either the M/ E 1 or M/ E 2 part of
the effect could be recalled separately by enabling only one and
recalling the register. Conversely, separate effects built at
different times, in different levels of the same register, can be
recalled together by enabling both M/ E 1 and M/ E 2.
Camera
Enables
The ME 1 and M/E 2 buttons are also used when setting transition
rates in the effects systems, as previously described (see TRAN
RATE).
M/E 1 and M/E 2 enable the following areas for learn and recall
operations on a specific M/ E: standard or layered mode
operation, crosspoint settings, transition settings, keyer settings,
masks and mattes, chroma key settings, wipes, positioner settings
and full additive mix (FAM) settings.
M/E 1
M/E 2
Bkgd
BKGD enables the two background matte generator settings
(BKGD 1 and BKGD 2 In the background subpanel) for learn and
recall operations, excluding matte wash.
2-47
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
MISC enables the following user-defined areas for learn and recall
Misc
operations: frame store settings, peripheral settings, GPI settings,
aux bus settings, mask bus settings, preview bus settings, and
matte wash settings for Backgrounds 1 and 2. All aux buses
default to the MISC level unless assigned to a DPM level using the
Config/ DPM Map Ports and Config/ DPM Map Aux Buses
menus.
chan 1, chan 2, Global, and Camera enable parameters of the
channel 1, channel 2, channel 3, and channel 4 DPMs (Digital
Picture Manipulators) for learn and recall operations.
Chan 1
Chan 2
Global
Camera
Pressing ENABLe ALL lights all Enable buttons if any or all of them
are not presently lit, or turns all Enable buttons off if all are
already lit. This action allows all enables to be turned off or on
with a maximum of two button presses. ENABLe ALL may also be
used to enable all levels simultaneously when setting transition
rates (see the TRAN RATE button description).
Enable
All
AUTO ReCalL allows the state of the Enable buttons to be learned
or recalled as part of an effect.
Auto
Recall
If AUTO ReCalL is on while an effect is learned, the state of the
Enable buttons is learned as part of the effect. If AUTO ReCalL is off
while an effect is learned, the enables are not learned, and any
subsequent recall (even if AUTO ReCalL is on during the recall)
does not change the state of the enables.
If AUTO ReCalL is on during a recall, the enables (as learned) are
first recalled, then the resulting enabled portions of the switcher
are recalled. If AUTO ReCalL is off during a recall, the enables
remain as set on the Enable panel, and those parts of the effect are
recalled.
AUTO RUN enables effect Recall-and-Run operations. When
AUTO RUN is active, a register recall causes a recall of the
register, sets the Time Cursor at Time 0, and causes an
immediate run if the effect contains more than one
keyframe.
Auto
Run
2-48
Effects Memory Subpanel
Effect Editing Controls
Clear
Work
Buffer
Const
Dur
Prev
Next
The effect editing controls are located at the right side of the
Effects Memory Subpanel.
Cut
Get
Put
Go To
KF
Go To
Time
Copy
Paste
Mark
KF
Dur
Effect
Dur
Timr
Cursor
Mark
Cursor
Insert
Before
Modify
Insert
After
Mark
Block
Edit
CLEAR WORK BUFR is used to clear out stored values from the
following switcher memory areas.
Clear
Work
Buffer
1. To Clear Current Working Buffer— except Keyers:
Single press of the CLEAR WORK BUFR button: (E-MEM
Subpanel)
Clears Current Working Buffer (CWB) to user-defined
defaults. The key memory portion of the CWB is unaffected
(for example, video processing or clip and gain). All non-key
memory parameters are cleared for enabled levels.
2. To Clear Current Working Buffer — including Keyers:
Double press of the CLEAR WORK BUFR button:
Same as above, with addition of key memory parameters
being cleared. Crosspoints are unaffected.
2-49
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
3. To Clear a Single Crosspoint Key Memory:
Hold a key bus crosspoint, single press CLEAR WORK
BUFR button:
Clears only the key memory portion of the Current Working
Buffer for switcher key crosspoints held down. Clears any
split keys for that key crosspoint.
4. To Clear Current Working Buffer for a selected E-MEM level
and clear any split keys for that key crosspoint— including
Keyers for E-MEM level owning Crosspoint Keyer:
Hold a key bus crosspoint, double press the CLEAR
WORK BUFR button.
CLEAR WORK BUFR is always functional, even when the other
effects editing buttons are not enabled (KEYFRAME EDITING set to
DISABLE in the Keyframe Menu).
The CLEAR WORK BUFR button is normally off, but lights for
one-half second when pressed.
NOTE: The “Current Register” is defined as the active register on each
E-MEM level. If all enabled levels are in the same register, the Current
Register is the same as that shown in the E-MEM keypad display.
However, if the enabled levels have different Current Registers, as
indicated by a “∆” between the bank number and the register number,
the Get and Put operations will operate on different registers. For
example, if enabled level M/E 1 is in Register 1, and enabled level M/E 2
is in Register 2, a “PUT CUR INTO 03” operation will copy M/E 1
Register 1 into M/E 1 Register 3, and M/E 2 Register 2 into M/E 2
Register 3.
GET provides a method of copying or “getting” the contents of a
specified register into the current register.
Get
The current switcher state and the current register number are
unaffected.
2-50
Effects Memory Subpanel
The GET button is at low tally whenever a get operation is
permissible and off when the operation is not permissible (no
current register, locked register).
When pressed, the GET button high-tallies and the E-MEM
readout provides a prompt. For example, if Bank 0 and register 7
are currently selected, the display prompts:
GET 0x INTO CUR
(If the bank were 1 and the current register 7, the display
would show: GET 1x INTO CUR)
To get the effect from a specific bank and register, change the bank
number if the correct bank is not already selected, then enter the
register number of the effect to be copied. Press ENTER to
complete the GET operation.
The GET operation does not copy sequence link information
(sequence link register or sequence delay) to the current register.
If the current register is locked, the GET operation will not be
performed, an error beep will sound, and the keypad readout will
show “REG IS LOCKED”.
An UNDO of the GET operation will restore the previous contents
to the current register, without affecting the current switcher state
or current register number.
Also, as mentioned previously under the • button description, the
GET button may be used for clearing out the current register by
pressing GET • ENTER.
The PUT button provides a method of copying or “putting” the
contents of the currently selected register into another E-MEM
register.
Put
2-51
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
The PUT button is at low tally whenever a PUT operation is
permissible and off when the operation is not permissible (no
current register).
When pressed, the PUT button high-tallies and the E-MEM
readout provides a prompt. For example, if Bank 0 and register 7
are currently selected, the display prompts:
PUT CUR INTO 0 x?
To put the current effect into a specific bank and register, change
the bank number if the correct bank is not already selected, then
enter the (destination) register number. Press ENTER to confirm
the PUT operation.
The PUT operation does not copy sequence link information
(sequence link register or sequence delay) to the destination
register.
If the destination register is locked, the PUT operation will not be
performed, an error beep will sound, and the keypad readout will
show “REG IS LOCKED”.
An UNDO of the PUT operation will restore the previous contents
to the destination register, without affecting the current switcher
state or current register number.
Also, as mentioned previously, the PUT button may be used to
copy the current register contents into the next empty register by
pressing PUT • ENTER.
NOTE: The remainder of the Effect Editing controls deal primarily with
effect keyframes and effect timelines.
Refer to “Effects and Keyframes” near the beginning of this
section for general definitions of effects and keyframes.
In the Model 2200, a Timeline is a graphical representation (in the
Timeline menu) of the keyframes and their time relationships on
a given enabled level in the current E-MEM register. Each enabled
register has its own timeline.
2-52
Effects Memory Subpanel
The Master Timeline (the top timeline in the Timeline menu) is a
composite representation of the timelines of all enabled levels in
the current E-MEM register. All time positions of the effect are
referenced to the Master Timeline.
A Master Timeline Keyframe is a point on the Master Timeline that
has a keyframe on one or more levels at that point in time.
The Current Time is the time position of the Time Cursor on the
Master Timeline of the effect.
The Current Keyframe is the keyframe and its duration on which
the Time Cursor is positioned.
Pressing the TIME CURSoR button once brings up the Timeline
menu of the current E-MEM register. If there is more than one
keyframe in the effect, the position of the Time Cursor may be
positioned on the timeline by the (RUN TIME) soft knob in the menu,
the Run lever arm on the E-MEM panel, or any of the effects
positioning buttons (GO TO KF, GO TO TIME, NEXT, PREV, or
REWIND).
Time
Cursor
The MARK CURSoR button is provided for future editing
operations; however, pressing MARK CURSoR once brings up the
Timeline menu.
Mark
Cursor
Modes of Insertion/Deletion
The editing mode selected determines the way keyframes are
added to or removed from an effect. The editing mode is selected
by the CONST DUR button (on/ off) on the E-MEM Effects Editing
panel and by the DELEGATES/ENABLES selection in the Main
Keyframe menu or the Timeline menu.
The four editing functions that add keyframes or delete keyframes
from an effect (Cut, Paste, Insert Before, and Insert After) are
affected by the selected editing mode and by the position of the
Time Cursor on the Master Timeline.
2-53
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
NOTE: Cuts, Inserts, and Pastes cannot be performed on any locked
level of an E-MEM register.
Only those levels that are delegated are affected by timeline editing.
When ENABLES is selected in the Timeline menu or the main
Keyframe menu, all enabled levels are also delegated; thus all
levels are affected. When DELEGATES is selected in the menu, only
specified enabled levels are delegated; all other enabled levels are
enabled but not delegated.
NOTE: The DELEGATES selection in the Timeline menu and main
Keyframe menu is discussed in the Effects Editing section of this manual.
Constant Duration Off
The following pages describe the operation of the keyframe
insertion/ deletion functions when Constant Duration mode is not
selected (CONST DUR button at low tally) and ENABLES is selected
in the Timeline menu or main Keyframe menu.
NOTE: Refer to the CONST DUR button description for the operation of
keyframe insertions and deletions in Constant Duration mode.
When CONST DUR is off, the overall duration of the effect is the sum of
the durations of the individual keyframes (on the Master Timeline).
Adding or deleting keyframes or changing the duration of one or more
keyframes may change the overall duration of the effect.
On a Keyframe. When the Time Cursor is positioned on a Master
Timeline keyframe, INSeRT BEFORe inserts a keyframe and its
duration into each delegated level just prior to the current
keyframe. All subsequent keyframes are “rippled” (pushed out)
in time by an amount equal to the newly inserted keyframe
duration. This increases the overall duration of the effect by the
duration of the inserted keyframe.
Insert
Before
2-54
Effects Memory Subpanel
The data entered into the keyframe on each delegated level is the
data in the Current Working Buffer, which is the same as the
Current Switcher State for that level.
Unless otherwise specified (see KF DUR), the duration of the
inserted keyframe is the same as that of the current keyframe.
Any delegated level that does not have a keyframe at that point in
time will have a keyframe inserted just before the current
keyframe.
On the Path. When the Time Cursor is “on-the-path” (not on a
Master Timeline keyframe), the INSeRT BEFORe button is tallied
off and the Insert operation is not allowed.
On a Keyframe. When the Time Cursor is positioned on a Master
Timeline keyframe, INSeRT AFTER inserts a keyframe and its
duration into each delegated level immediately following the
duration of the current keyframe (in other words, just before the
next keyframe). All subsequent keyframes are “rippled” (pushed
out) in time by an amount equal to the newly inserted keyframe
duration. This increases the overall duration of the effect by the
duration of the inserted keyframe.
Insert
After
The data entered into the keyframe on each delegated level is the
data in the Current Working Buffer, which is the same as the
Current Switcher State for that level.
Unless otherwise specified (see KF DUR), the duration of the
inserted keyframe is the same as that of the current keyframe.
Any delegated level that does not have a keyframe at that point in
time will have a keyframe and its duration inserted just after the
current keyframe. The current time position moves to the time
point of the newly-inserted keyframe.
On the Path. When the Time Cursor is located “on-the-path” (not
on a Master Timeline keyframe), INSeRT AFTER inserts a
keyframe on each delegated level but does not add time to the
overall effect.
2-55
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
The data entered into the keyframe on each delegated level is the
data in the Current Working Buffer, which is the same as the
Current Switcher State for that level. This includes the values of all
parameters at that point, interpolated on-the-path between the
two keyframes, plus any changes that may have been made on the
control panel and in the menus since stopping at that point on the
timeline.
The duration of the inserted keyframe is the difference between
the point of insertion and the position of the next keyframe. The
duration of the previous keyframe (what had been the current
keyframe) is decreased by the same amount. The current time
position remains at the point of the newly-inserted keyframe.
Cut
When the Time Cursor is positioned on a Master Timeline
keyframe, CUT deletes the keyframe from any delegated level that
has a keyframe, and deletes the duration of the Master Timeline
keyframe from all delegated levels, even those that do not have a
keyframe at that point. All subsequent keyframes are rippled
backward in time (toward Time 0) by an amount equal to the
duration on the Master Timeline of the deleted keyframe. This
decreases the overall duration of the effect by the duration of the
cut keyframe.
When the Time Cursor is not on a Master Timeline keyframe, the
CUT button is disabled and the Cut operation is not permitted.
COPY makes a copy of the data in the Current Working Buffer, for
all delegated levels, and places it in the Clipboard Buffer. No
changes are made to the effect.
Copy
If the Time Cursor is on a keyframe on the Master Timeline when
the Copy is done, the duration of the copied keyframe is the
duration of the Master Timeline keyframe. If the current time
position is on-the-path on the Master Timeline, the keyframe
duration is the difference between the current time position and
the position of the next keyframe.
The keyframe can then be pasted into another effect (same levels)
or into another point in the same effect (same levels).
2-56
Effects Memory Subpanel
The PASTE button inserts a keyframe (on all delegated levels) into
an effect. This operation is essentially the same as doing an Insert
After, with the following exceptions: For a Paste, the data to be
inserted comes from the Clipboard Buffer, rather than from the
Current Working Buffer, and the keyframe duration also comes
from the Clipboard if the Paste is done on a keyframe. If the Paste
is done on-the-path, the keyframe duration is handled the same as
that of an Insert After, adding no time to the effect.
Paste
Constant Duration On
The following paragraphs describe the operation of keyframe
insertion/ deletion in Constant Duration mode. Refer to the
previous portion of this section for operation with Constant
Duration turned off.
CONST DUR forces the overall duration of an effect to be constant
during editing, except as noted here. The length of the existing
effect is unchanged by keyframe deletions (cuts) or additions
(inserts or pastes). When CONST DUR is on, the button is high-
tallied; when off, it is low-tallied if edit mode is enabled, or tallied
off if edit mode is off.
Const
Dur
Also, in Constant Duration mode, the KF DUR button is tallied off,
indicating that keyframe duration modifications are not allowed.
All Inserts and Pastes in Constant Duration mode must be made
on-the-path—they are not allowed on keyframes—except as follows:
An Insert Before may be done on the first keyframe of an
effect, or an Insert After or Paste may be done on the last
keyframe of an effect. The duration and timing of the original
effect are not affected, but the inserted keyframe is appended
to the effect, increasing its overall duration.
2-57
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
When an Insert or Paste is done on-the-path in Constant Duration
mode, the duration of the inserted keyframe is subtracted from
that of the previous keyframe.
A Paste operation in Constant Duration mode is similar to an
Insert After, except that the data to be pasted comes from the
Clipboard Buffer, rather than the Current Working Buffer.
A Cut must be made on a keyframe, whether CONST DUR is on or
off. If a Cut is done in Constant Duration mode, the keyframe state
is deleted and the duration of the cut keyframe is added to the
duration of the previous keyframe. The Time Cursor remains
positioned at the point of deletion.
NOTE: The following operations are the same whether CONST DUR is on
or off.
Modify Keyframes
Modify
When the Time Cursor is positioned on a Master Timeline
keyframe, pressing the MODify button once enters any
modification that has been made on any delegated level. When
MODify is pressed, the button high-tallies for one-half second to
confirm the Mod operation.
If an individual delegated level does not have a keyframe at the
time location where a Mod is being done, the Mod operation will
insert a keyframe on-the-path if any changes have been made on
that level. The duration of the inserted keyframe is taken from that
of the previous keyframe. No change is made to the overall effect
duration.
2-58
Effects Memory Subpanel
Modify All Keyframes (Relative)
When the Time Cursor is positioned on a Master Timeline
keyframe, pressing the MODify button twice applies any
modification that has been made on any delegated level to all
keyframes on that level. For instance, if you want to change the
background color by 180° in all keyframes on the M/ E 1 level,
place the cursor on any keyframe, change the background color,
and press MODify twice (generally referred to as Mod All Relative
operation).
It is also possible to modify all keyframes on a given level to a
single value (for example, changing the background to Blue in all
keyframes on that level) by doing a Mod All Absolute operation.
This function is accessed through the Keyframe menu, as
described in the menu descriptions portion of this manual
KF DUR allows you to change the duration of the current keyframe
or to set the duration of a keyframe to be inserted. If not all
delegated levels are on a keyframe, or if different delegated levels
have differing keyframe durations, pressing KF DUR will add an
appropriate change to the current keyframe duration on all levels.
KF
Dur
When pressed, KF DUR high-tallies and the E-MEM display shows
the current keyframe duration:
KF DUR SSS:FF.f
where SSS=Seconds, FF=Frames, and f=field(s) of the desired
keyframe duration.
2-59
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
A new duration may be entered as follows on the E-MEM keypad:
1
S S S • F F • f ENTER
The keyframe duration is then applied to all delegated levels by
pressing MODify once.
Effect
Dur
The EFFect DUR button is provided for future editing operations.
PREV and NEXT are used to step the effect forward or backward to
the next keyframe on the Master Timeline.
Prev
Next
When the PREV or NEXT button is pressed, it high-tallies for one-
half second to confirm the operation.
The PREV button is off at the beginning of an effect or if the effect
has zero or one keyframe. The NEXT button is off at the end of an
effect or when the effect has zero or one keyframe.
GO TO TIME enables positioning of the effect to a specific position
on the Master Timeline. When GO TO TIME is active, the desired
time is entered as follows on the E-MEM keypad:
Go To
Time
SSS•FF•fENTER
where SSS=Seconds, FF=Frames, and f=field(s) of the desired
point in time
or as abbreviated above under KF DUR.
GOTO KF moves the Time Cursor to the specified keyframe on the
Master Timeline.
Go To
KF
1. Not all digits are required for defining the time. The system will recognize the • button presses to de-
termine which digits are seconds, which are frames, and which are fields. For instance, to enter 2
seconds and 5 frames (65 frames or 130 fields), you would need only to enter:
2 • 5 ENTER
or • 6 5 ENTER
or • • 1 3 0 ENTER
In all of these cases, the display will show:
KF DUR 002:05.0
2-60
Effects Memory Subpanel
To move to the desired keyframe, press the GOTO KF button, enter
the number on the keypad, then press the ENTER button.
(A 3-digit number is entered automatically without pressing
ENTER).
The MARK button is provided for future clipboard operations.
Mark
The MARK BLOCK button is provided for future clipboard
operations.
Mark
Block
NOTE: Refer to the Effects Editing section of this manual for additional
information on use of the Effect Editing controls.
Run Controls
The Run controls, which are above the E-MEM Subpanel,
determine the manner in which the selected E-MEM effect
will run.
Stop
Next
KF
Hold
Input
Reverse
Rewind
Run
Run Control
Figure 2-9. E[MEM Run Controls
2-61
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Pressing STOP NEXT KF causes an effect to be stepped through,
Stop
Next
KF
one Master Timeline keyframe at a time. When on, STOP NEXT KF
causes run commands to last the duration of one keyframe, and
a time. The button is at high tally when the function is selected, at
low tally when enabled but not selected.
Hold
Input
When HOLD INPUT is enabled (high tally), all crosspoints (video
and key) on all buses of the switcher are held. That is, the state of
the crosspoints do not change when an E-MEM recall is done. If
key memory is on at this time, the current keyer memory state is
also held. (See Recalling Effects on page 2-38 for information
about holding crosspoints on individual buses.)
Pressing the RUN button causes an effect to begin running from its
current position. The RUN button is also used to stop and resume
an effect during the run by acting as a run toggle button. The RUN
button lights during a run, then turns off when the run is
complete.
Run
2-62
Effects Memory Subpanel
The Run lever arm can be used to manually run an effect.
Moving the lever arm causes the current effect to run.
Normally, the position of the lever arm directly corresponds
to the relative percentage of run completion; however, if
the lever arm and the effect get out of sync (for example, the
lever arm is not at an endpoint when a register is recalled),
the remaining lever arm movement is scaled to the
remaining effect duration. (Forward direction is scaled to
the end of the effect; reverse direction is scaled to the start
of the effect.)
The Run lever arm may also be used for positioning the
Time Cursor in the Timeline menu when building an effect.
The LEDs to the left of the lever arm give a visual indication
of run completion for either the lever arm or the run button.
REVerse causes an effect to run backwards. The button may be
pressed before or during the effect run (on-the-fly). The button
lights and stays lit when pressed, then toggles off when pressed
again.
Reverse
Rewind
REWIND positions the current effect at Time 0. If an effect is
already running when this button is pressed, the effect run stops
and the effect returns to Time 0. The REVerse button inverts the
REWIND function. In other words, it positions the effect at the last
keyframe of the effect. The REWIND button lights for one-half
second any time it is pressed.
NOTE: Refer to the Effects Editing section of this manual for additional
information on use of the Run controls.
2-63
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Positioner Joystick
The Positioner joystick allows wipes to be moved from their
current position to another position on the screen.
The delegation buttons located below the joystick (Figure 2-10)
enable control of the primary and (optional) secondary wipe
patterns to be delegated to either or both M/ Es.
M/E 1
Pri
M/E 1
Sec
If all of the delegation buttons are turned off, the joystick is
disabled.
M/E 2
Sec
M/E 2
Pri
NOTE: The position of a wipe pattern cannot be changed if both POS
NORM and POS AUTO are off for that wipe generator, even if the joystick
is delegated via its delegation button. See “Wipe Positioner Buttons”
on page 2-71.
Selection/Turbo
Button (2200i)
M/E 1
Pri
M/E 2
Pri
M/E 1
Sec
M/E 2
Sec
Figure 2-10. Positioner Subpanel
Direction and speed of pattern movement are determined by the
direction and distance the joystick is moved. The farther it is
moved from the center position, the faster the pattern moves.
When released, the joystick returns to its center position, leaving
the pattern where it is currently positioned.
2-64
Wipe Subpanel
Wipe Subpanel
The Wipe Subpanel (Figure 2-11) is used to control all four of the
wipe pattern generators in the switcher. Each M/ E has a primary
wipe generator and may have an optional secondary wipe pattern
generator. The secondary wipe pattern generator option allows
complete independence between the primary and secondary
wipes with no interaction between them.
Even if the secondary wipe pattern generator option is not
installed, secondary wipes are available, but only the edge
attributes of the secondary wipe are independent. (Edge attributes
include preset size, softness, soft symmetry, border width, border
matte, border opacity and normal/ reverse.) Pattern select,
rotation modes, positioner modes, and pattern modifiers are the
same values as those of the primary wipe generator on the same
M/ E.
Wipe
User
User
User
1
3
5
User
User
User
2
4
6
Soft
Symmetry Softness
Border
Aspect
Opacity
Width
Menu
Random
Texture
User
Wipe
Undo
Learn
User
Wipe
Preset Size Aspect
Rotate
Speed
Rotate
Mag
Pos
Norm
Rotate
Pos
Reverse
Flip
Flop
Pos
Auto
Normal
Split
H
Multi
V
Multi
Rotate
Rotation Type
Wipe Direction
Pattern Modifiers
Positioner
Pattern
Mix
M/E 1
Pri
M/E 1
Sec
M/E 2
Pri
M/E 2
Sec
Pattern Mix
Delegate
Figure 2-11. Wipe Subpanel
2-65
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
The transition WIPE button in the Transition Subpanel always uses
the primary wipe generator. Preset wipes, masks, and matte wash
can also use the secondary wipe generator.
Wipe Delegation
Pressing any one of the Wipe delegation buttons
at the bottom of the Wipe Subpanel delegates the
entire Wipe Subpanel to the named wipe
generator.
M/E 2
Pri
M/E 2
Sec
M/E 1
Pri
M/E 1
Sec
Wipe Pattern Buttons
Pressing any of the Wipe pattern buttons (see Figure 2-11) selects
that wipe pattern and lights the button. These buttons are
mutually exclusive (including MENU); pressing one selects a
pattern and de-selects the previously active pattern. Pressing the
MENU pattern button selects a pattern that was previously chosen
in the pattern menu. Double-pressing the MENU button opens the
wipe pattern menu. Wipe patterns not available on the pattern
select panel may be selected through the Wipe menu, described
later in this section under “Menu Descriptions.”
Menu
Random
Texture
RANDOM selects one of the available random patterns.
TEXTURE selects a user-adjusted texture pattern, selected in the
Wipe Texture menu.
2-66
Wipe Subpanel
LEARN USERWIPE – The six USER 1 - USER 6 wipe buttons let you
learn a wipe effect into memory and then recall it all at once.
Everything on the Wipe Subpanel is learned except the delegate
buttons. Upon recall, the stored wipe parameters are transferred
to the delegated wipe generator. This shared system allows you to
transfer wipe effects from one wipe generator to another.
User 1 User 2
User 3 User 4
User 5 User 6
To store a wipe setup, press the LEARN USER WIPE button,
followed by any one of the six USER buttons. The current wipe
pattern selection and all modifiers will be memorized into the
USER register. To recall the wipe effect later, press that USER
button. After a USER button is pressed, either for a learn or recall
operation, the button remains lit as a reminder that it was the last
one used.
Learn
User
Wipe
USER WIPE UNDO allows an accidental USER wipe recall or learn
to be “un-done.” When undoing a recall, pressing this button
restores the panel to the state that existed before the last learn;
when undoing a learn, it restores the user register to its previous
state (the control panel is not affected).
User
Wipe
Undo
Wipe Controls
Pressing the SOFT button toggles the wipe edge softness on and
off. When the button is illuminated, wipe edge softness can be
adjusted with the (SOFTNESS) knob.
Soft
The (SOFTNESS) knob controls the amount of wipe edge softness
when SOFT is on. A setting of full counter-clockwise rotation
causes zero softness, while full clockwise rotation causes
maximum softness.
Softness
2-67
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Turning the (SYMMETRY) knob controls the relative softness
between the inside and outside wipe border edges, when the
SOFT and BORDer, buttons are turned on. The last value of
(SYMMETRY) is remembered when either BORDer, or SOFT is
turned off.
Symmetry
BORDer toggles control of the wipe border on and off. When
BORDer is on, the adjacent (WIDTH) and (OPACITY) knobs become
active for modifying the wipe border. The wipe border is
functional on transition and preset wipes only.
Border
The (WIDTH) knob sets the width of the wipe border when BORDer
is on. When BORDer is turned off, the last value of (WIDTH) is
remembered and is recalled when BORDer is turned on again.
Width
The (OPACITY) knob controls the opacity or translucence of the
wipe border when BORDer is on. The (OPACITY) value is
remembered when BORDer is turned off.
Opacity
(PRESET SIZE) adjusts the wipe pattern size for preset patterns
used in non-transitional wipe patterns. It is also used to adjust the
size of masks that use the wipe generator.
Preset Size
The ASPECT button toggles control of the (ASPECT) knob
(horizontal to vertical ratio) of the wipe pattern on and off.
Aspect
Turning the (ASPECT) knob clockwise from mid-position
stretches the horizontal axis of the wipe pattern. Similarly, turning
the knob counter-clockwise from mid-position stretches the
vertical axis.
Aspect
2-68
Wipe Subpanel
Wipe Rotation Controls
The 3 wipe rotation buttons, ROtate POS, ROtate
Rotate
Pos
Rotate
Speed
Rotate
Mag
speed, and ROTate MAG are mutually exclusive and
toggle on and off. Only one of these buttons can be on
at a time.
The (ROTATE) knob, located adjacent to the three rotation type
buttons, controls whichever mode is enabled. The knob setting for
each of the three rotation modes is remembered even when the
modes are de-selected.
Rotate
ROT POS (rotate position) allows rotation of the wipe pattern to a
fixed angle. With this mode on, turning the (ROTATE) knob from
its mid-position rotates the entire wipe pattern up to four
complete rotations, either clockwise or counterclockwise.
Rotate
Pos
ROTate SPeeD allows constant rotation of the wipe pattern at a
rate adjusted by the (ROTATE) knob. Turning the knob clockwise
or counterclockwise from mid-position causes the wipe pattern to
rotate up to a maximum of four rotations per second.
Rotate
Speed
ROTate MAG (rotate magnitude) causes the wipe pattern to rotate
as a function of the transition position (lever arm or auto
transition). The amount and direction of rotation is adjusted by
the (ROTATE) knob. Turning the knob clockwise or
Rotate
Mag
counterclockwise causes the wipe pattern to rotate up to a
maximum of four rotations during the course of the wipe
transition. The starting angle (or position) of the pattern is
determined by the ROtate POS value.
2-69
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Wipe Pattern Mix
PATTern MIX toggles the pattern mix mode on or off. When PTN MIX
Pattern
Mix
SOURCE is set to NORMAL in the menu, the pattern mix mode causes
the delegated wipe generator to mix its pattern with the other
wipe generator pattern on a given M/ E. (The “other wipe
generator” is the secondary generator if delegated to the primary,
or the primary generator if delegated to the secondary.) When PTN
MIX SOURCE is set to TEXTURE, the pattern mix mode causes the
delegated wipe generator to mix its pattern with the texture
pattern.
The adjacent (PATTERN MIX) knob controls the mix ratio between
the two pattern generators. If the PTN MIX TYPE is NAM+ or NAM-
(as selected in the Wipe Modifier menu), the pattern mix knob
controls the relative size of the two patterns. The knob value
(shared by mix and NAM modes) is remembered when the
PATTern MIX button is turned off.
Pattern Mix
Wipe Direction
NORMal and REVerse select the wipe direction (normal or reverse).
One of these buttons is always on.
Normal
Reverse
Flip
Flop
FLIP FLOP toggles flip-flop mode on and off. When flip-flop mode
is on, the wipe direction changes at the end of each wipe
transition. (The NORMal and REVerse lights alternate on and off
during a wipe, every time the transition reaches the opposite
limit.)
NOTE: The NORMal, REVerse, and FLIP FLOP buttons on the wipe
subpanel do not affect the primary preset pattern key. Instead, a menu
selection provides a choice of either NORMAL or REVERSE.
2-70
Wipe Subpanel
Wipe Pattern Modifiers
The SPLIT button toggles split mode on and off. When split mode
is on, the selected wipe pattern is split into two. Split operation is
affected by the SPLIT OFFSET button and knob in the Wipe Modifier
menu.
Split
H MULTI and V MULTI allow multiple copies of the same wipe
pattern to appear.
H
Multi
V
Multi
Pressing H MULTI results in an additional copy of the wipe pattern
being arranged horizontally (in a row). One additional copy of the
pattern is supplied for each push of the button, up to a maximum
of eight rows. Similarly,
V MULTI produces multiple patterns arranged vertically in a
column. Pressing both V MULTI and H MULTI at the same time
results in a grid alignment of multiple patterns.
If either button is held down for 1/ 2 second, that aspect
(horizontal or vertical) returns to a single pattern.
Additional modifiers are available through menus available
under the Wipe menu. These menus are described in Section
Three of this manual.
Wipe Positioner Buttons
The POS NORM and POS AUTO buttons are mutually exclusive;
Pos
Auto
Pos
Norm
only one can be on, although both can be off. If both are off,
delegating the joystick has no effect on the pattern. See “Positioner
Joystick” on page 2-64.
Pressing POS NORM allows you to move the center of the wipe
solid with the delegated joystick on the positioner subpanel.
When used for a wipe transition, the POS NORM button may cause
the wipe edge to pop if the pattern is too far off center when a
transition is performed.
2-71
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
The POS AUTO button invokes an auto positioner mode allowing
you to place a wipe pattern anywhere on the screen. You can then
make a transition between the wipe pattern and a second video
source without the second video “popping” at the end of the lever
arm travel.
When auto position is selected, the size of the wipe pattern is
scaled according to the distance it is positioned off-center. That is,
the wipe pattern gets smaller as it moves away from screen center.
You can also move the wipe pattern completely off-screen and
bring it back again.
Auto positioning may be used with primary, secondary, and
program/ preset wipes.
Auto positioning has no effect with matrix (non-solid type) wipe
patterns.
2-72
Masks Subpanel
Masks Subpanel
The masks subpanel (Figure 2-12) services and controls all video
key masks in the switcher. A mask is a control signal used to
modify a key signal. Delegation of the subpanel allows it to
control any of the masks. Buttons and knobs are provided for
controlling mask position and aesthetic features.
Mask
Top/Gain
Left
Right
Bottom/Clip
Force
Mask
Inhibit
Mask
Mask
Invert
Box
Pri
Wipe
Sec
Wipe
Mask
Bus
M/E 1
Key 1
M/E 1
Key 2
M/E 2
Key 1
M/E 2
Key 2
Figure 2-12. Masks Subpanel
2-73
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Mask Delegation
Pressing one of the delegation buttons selects one of
the mask generators. Only one button can be on at a
time.
M/E 1
Key 1
M/E 1
Key 2
M/E 2
Key 1
M/E 2
Key 2
INHibit MASK delegates the mask subpanel controls for adjusting
the inhibit mask. The actual selection of mask inhibit is performed
on the keyer subpanel (see the MASK INH discussion under the
Keyer panel description).
Inhibit
Mask
FORCE MASK delegates the mask subpanel controls for making
adjustments to a forced mask. The actual selection of force mask is
performed on the keyer subpanel (see the FORCE MASK
discussion under the Keyer panel description.
Force
Mask
Auto delegation of the mask subpanel may occur when other
buttons on the control panel are pressed. (Refer to the Auto
Delegation discussion earlier in this section.)
Mask Source Selection
The top row of buttons (excluding MASK INVert) select sources
that determine the shape of the mask. These buttons are mutually
exclusive and one is always active.
BOX uses a rectangular box generator for the mask. The box is
completely independent of the wipe systems. The four knobs at
the top of masks subpanel determine the position of the four sides
of the box. The box mask has hard edges. Each keyer has its own
box, so it is possible to have up to six differently sized box masks
in use at a time.
Box
PRI WIPE selects the primary (transition) wipe generator to
produce the mask. The primary wipe generator in the same M/ E
provides the mask signal. Wipe Subpanel controls select the
pattern, size, position and edge softness.
Pri
Wipe
2-74
Masks Subpanel
SEC WIPE selects the secondary (optional) wipe generator to
Sec
Wipe
produce the mask. The secondary wipe generator in the same
M/ E provides the mask signal. If the secondary wipe option is not
installed, the pattern shape and position are the same as the
primary wipe generator. Pattern size and edge softness are still
independent of the primary wipe mask source.
Mask
Bus
MASK BUS selects a video source to generate the mask. The mask
bus is a dedicated video bus in the primary matrix accessed with
a bus delegate button in the Aux Bus Subpanel of the panel. The
mask bus permits any primary or re-entered input to be used as a
mask source. A clip and gain circuit in the mask generator
processes the selected video input for display in the mask. When
MASK BUS is selected, the (TOP/GAIN) knob becomes a gain
control and the (BOTTOM/CLIP) knob becomes a clip control.
Mask Controls
Several knobs and one button on the masks subpanel control the
size and edge characteristics of the mask.
An edge of the mask cannot be moved past the edge of the raster
or past the opposite mask edge. On a box mask, as one edge is
adjusted to reach the opposite mask edge or the edge of the raster,
the control function stops and the knob beeps. Turning the knob
in the other direction then shows the mask edge.
The Mask (TOP/GAIN) and (BOTTOM/CLIP) knobs function only as
gain and clip controls when the mask source is delegated to the
Mask bus. The clip and gain-adjusted Mask bus can be frozen in
the mask frame store (or mask store).
2-75
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
(TOP/GAIN) is a two-purpose knob whose operation is dependent
on whether the BOX button or the MASK BUS or MASK STORE
button is pressed. If BOX is active, the (TOP/GAIN) knob controls
the top side of the box-style mask (see BOX button description). If
MASK BUS is active, the (TOP/GAIN) knob controls the gain of the
Mask bus clipper.
Top/Gain
(BOTTOM/CLIP) is a two-purpose knob whose operation is
dependent on whether the BOX button or the MASK BUS or MASK
STORE button is pressed, just as with the (TOP/GAIN) knob. If BOX
is active, the (BOTTOM) knob controls the bottom of the box-style
mask (see BOX button description). If MASK BUS or MASK STORE
is active, this knob controls the Mask bus clipper.
Bottom/Clip
Right
The (LEFT) and (RIGHT) knobs control the left and right sides of
the box-style mask. They are inactive if BOX is not selected.
Left
The MASK INVert button inverts the polarity of the signal used to
create the mask. A mask that normally allows a key inside of a
box, will allow a key outside the box when MASK INVert is on.
Mask Invert functions with all mask sources.
Mask
Invert
2-76
Frame Store Subpanel
Frame Store Subpanel
The primary functions of the Frame Store option are storage of
still video and key images and creation of dropshadows behind
keys. Controls for manipulation of these functions are found on
the Frame Store Subpanel and menus.
The Frame Store option allows storage and retrieval of images at
a 10-bit resolution. Up to four 2-field pages can be stored in both
the video store and the key store. Video and Key inputs may be
frozen together or independently. The images can later be read
with either one- or two-field mode. Either replication or
interpolation may be used if one field readout is selected.
Frame Store is controlled from a dedicated group of controls on
the upper Control Panel. Frame Store is source oriented in that its
inputs are fed with an AUX/ effects send bus (Aux 4) and the
outputs are available as primary inputs to the crosspoint matrix.
You can assemble complex graphics by layering multiple picture
elements into a final composite image. Adding dropshadows is
made easier by the provision of a Frame Store real-time
dropshadow mode. Using this feature, variable-density full-
resolution shadows can be created from the key signal and
positioned anywhere within the raster.
2-77
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Frame Store Features:
■
■
Freeze video and key
Mosaic, Pseudo-color Bit-map Effects, Blur, Repositioning,
Strobe, Rectangular Cropping, and Hue Rotate.
■
■
■
Write after read capability allowing layering of stills in a
recursive manner. (i.e., frame store could receive output from
an M/ E that is using the frame store as one of its inputs).
Ability to provide a real-time drop shadow on a key that can
be positioned anywhere in the raster. Shadow can be blurred
independent of Video and Key.
Frame Store Video and Key may be composited on top of a
background.
■
■
Four two-field images may be captured.
1 or 2 fields read when frozen with replicate or interpolation
on readout.
Frame Store
Shadow
On
Horizontal Vertical Opacity
Position Position
Field 1
Field 2
Freeze
Grab
Video
Store
Key
Store
Figure 2-13. Frame Store Subpanel
2-78
Frame Store Subpanel
Input Selection
Aux bus pair 4A/ 4B can be used to supply inputs to the frame
store video and key channels.
Output Routing
Video and key outputs from the frame store are routed to the
switcher crosspoint matrix and may be used as primary switcher
inputs. The video and key outputs are also routed to an output
module for use by external devices.
If the frame store is not in Freeze mode, its output is delayed by
2 fields from its input.
Still Image Storage
Video and key can be frozen either separately or simultaneously
through the use of panel controls. In addition, the system has
read-before-write capability, so stills can be layered in a recursive
manner. The system accomplishes this by sending the output of
the frame store to the input of an M/ E for combination with
another image. A composite is generated that can be fed back to
the input of the frame store and re-frozen.
The Video Store and Key Store buttons select whether the Frame
Store Subpanel is assigned to the video channel or key channel.
One of these buttons is always lit. Video Store and Key Store may
be selected simultaneously.
Video
Store
Key
Store
Operations that can be independently set for video and key
channels are as follows:
■
■
■
Freeze
Grab
Field 1 and Field 2
2-79
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
When Vand KEY 1 are delegated simultaneously, the key channel
settings are automatically aligned with the video channel settings.
The Freeze button provides a freeze/ unfreeze function that
toggles between states. Press once to freeze, press a second time to
unfreeze. When enabled, this button stops data from being
written to the frame store, resulting in a frozen image.
Freeze
Grab
Pressing the Grab button updates the frame store with new input
data and freezes the new data. If freeze is off (moving video is
coming out of the frame store), pressing Grab turns on freeze.
Freeze can be turned off again by pressing the FRZE button. If
freeze is on and Grab is pressed, the frame store is unfrozen for
two fields and then frozen again. The Freeze button remains lit to
indicate that freeze is still on. Since the GRAB button initiates a
single one-time action, it lights only while the button is pressed
and for a short instant afterward.
Field1 and Field 2 determine the field, or fields, that are read out
while the image is frozen. Either field may be selected, or both
may be selected at the same time. (When unfrozen, the Field
buttons have no effect.)
Field 1
Field 2
A full frame is always frozen, regardless of the state of these
buttons. This method of storage allows the operator to decide
between fields and frames after the image is frozen.
When an image is read from the frame store in field mode, the
“other” field is replicated from the selected field (indicated by the
illuminated Field 1 button), if REPLICATE mode is selected in the
Video Store menu. If INTERPOLATE mode is selected in the menu,
the “other” field is interpolated from the selected field.
2-80
Frame Store Subpanel
Drop Shadow
The Drop Shadow button turns shadow mode on and off.
Drop
Shadow
When shadow mode is on, the Horizontal Position and Vertical
Position knobs adjust the horizontal and vertical offset of the
shadow from the main key signal. A third knob, Opacity, adjusts
the opacity of the shadow.
Horizontal
Position
DROP SHDW mode is functional only with primary video inputs
that have an associated linear key signal or an M/ E in layered
mode. No clip and gain adjustments are available to the user.
Dropshadow mode does not reduce the bandwidth of the key
channel.
Vertical
Position
Drop Shadow is added to the key signal; the video output is
unaffected. Therefore the Frame Store video and key must be
composited on top of another layer in order to see the
dropshadow.
Opacity
2-81
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
External Interface Subpanel
The External Interface Subpanel, located near the left end of the
upper control panel, provides selection of the type of interface to
be used to communicate with external devices.
External Interface
Editor
Enable
GPI
Enable
Periph
Enable
Figure 2-14. External Interface Subpanel
The buttons in this subpanel perform the following functions:
The EDIT Enable button enables or disables editor access to the
switcher. Initially pressing the button illuminates it and allows
external control of the switcher through the Editor port. Pressing
the button a second time turns off the button lamp and disables
editor control of the switcher. With EDIT Enable off, editor
protocol messages that affect the switcher are still acknowledged
by the switcher, although it does not act under Editor control. For
example, the switcher will still send status information to the
editor.
Edit
Enable
NOTE: An editor cannot control the EDIT Enable button via software
protocol. In addition, the EDIT Enable button does not affect
communication through the other serial ports.
2-82
External Interface Subpanel
The GPI enable button enables and disables GPI outputs and
control of the switcher from GPI inputs. When GPI enable is on,
control inputs from GPI relay contacts are read by the switcher,
and GPI outputs from the switcher are also active for external use.
When the button is off, all GPI inputs and outputs are disabled.
GPI
Enable
The PERIPH Enable button functions in a manner similar to that of
the EDIT Enable button, except that it controls peripheral access to
the switcher via any peripheral-configured serial port and it does
not acknowledge protocol messages while it is turned off.
Periph
Enable
2-83
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Background Subpanel
The background matte Subpanel controls the two background
matte generators.
Background
M/E 2
Sec
Wash
M/E 1
Sec
Wash
Hue/
Softness
Flat
Matte
Matte 2
Saturation/
Offset
Bkgd 1
Bkgd 2
Brightness
Figure 2-15. Background Subpanel
Matte Select Buttons
The Bkgd 1 and Bkgd 2 select which of the background matte
generators the matte modifier controls are changing.
Bkgd 1
Bkgd 2
2-84
Background Subpanel
Matte Modifier Controls
Four buttons and three control knobs in each matte subpanel
control the characteristics of the delegated background matte.
When a Matte Subpanel is delegated away from a matte generator
the status of the knobs and buttons is remembered
The FLAT MATTE button selects a non-wash matte for the
delegated matte generator. Pressing this button deselects all other
matte mode buttons MATTE 2, PRI WIPE WASH, and SEC WIPE
WASH on that matte.
Flat
Matte
The MATTE 2 button delegates the matte controls to the second
matte generator when a matte wash is selected. To select a matte
wash, press either PRI WIPE WASH or SEC WIPE WASH on that
matte.
Matte 2
PRIWIPEWASH selects the primary (Transition) wipe generator to
modulate between the two mattes during a wash. Pressing and
holding this button allows you to change the transition softness
with the (HUE/SOFTNESS) knob and the offset (position) with the
(SATURATION/OFFSET) knob.
Pri
Wipe
Wash
SEC WIPE WASH causes the secondary (optional) wipe generator
to be used to modulate between the two mattes in a wash.
Pressing and holding this button allows you to change the
transition softness with the (HUE/SOFTNESS) knob and the offset
(position) with the (SATURATION/OFFSET) knob.
Sec
Wipe
Wash
(HUE/SOFTNESS) knob – Adjusts the hue of the matte. The knob
also adjusts the softness (gain) of the transition between the two
matte generators when you hold down the PRIWIPEWASH or SEC
WIPE WASH, button. Softness is not adjustable while FLAT MATTE
is active.
Hue/
Softness
(SATURATION/OFFSET) knob – Adjusts the color saturation of the
matte. The knob adjusts the offset (position) of the wash
modulation when you hold down the PRIWIPEWASH or SECWIPE
WASH button. Offset is not adjustable while FLAT MATTE is active.
Saturation/
Offset
(BRIGHTNESS) knob – Adjusts the color brightness of the matte.
Brightness
2-85
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Floppy Disk Drive
The floppy disk drive (Figure 2-16) is located in the left end of the
Upper Control Panel.
Figure 2-16. Floppy Drive
Operations available by way of the disk drive are
■
■
■
Formatting disks
Saving and loading system configurations
Saving and loading E-MEM register data
Refer to the Disk Menu portion of Section Three for disk operating
instructions.
2-86
Preview/Aux Bus Source Select and Delegate Subpanel
Preview/Aux Bus Source Select and Delegate Subpanel
The PVW AUX buttons are used to select sources for the preview,
mask, and aux bus facilities. This row of buttons is located along
the top of the lower section of the Control Panel. (Figure 2-17.)
Pvw
Aux
Black Cam
1
Cam
2
Cam
3
VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DPM
1
DPM
2
Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Routr Color
Shift
M/E 1 M/E 2
Pgm Pgm
1
2
3
4
2
3
Bkgd
Aux 1-4 Effects Send Only
Preview Only
Bus Delegate
M/E 1 M/E 1 M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 2 M/E 2
Key 1 Key 2 Key 1 Key 2
M/E 2
Pvw
Pvw
Aux
4
Aux
5
M/E 1
Pvw
Mask Aux
1
Aux
2
Aux
3
A
A
Figure 2-17. PVW AUX Source Select and Delegate Buttons
The PVW AUX crosspoints consist of five groups of buttons:
■
■
Primary Source Select (BLACK... SHIFT)
Secondary (Re-entry) Source Select (M/E 1 PGM,
M/E 2 PGM
■
■
■
Aux 1-2 Effects Send Only Select (M/E 1 A... M/E 2 KEY 2)
Preview Only Select (M/E 1 PVW... M/E 2 PVW)
Bus Delegate Select (PVW... AUX 5)
2-87
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Source Selection
The first two groups of buttons select primary and
secondary (re-entry) video/ key sources for PVW,
MASK, and AUX 1-5 output buses.
Black
M/E 2
Program
. . .
The re-entry sources are M/ E 1 and M/ E 2 program outputs
The selected source button is either bright or dim, depending
upon its on-air status. All other buttons in the row are unlit.
Effects Send Buttons
The Effects Send buttons select output of both video
and key sources. Key outputs must be associated
with selected video sources.
M/E 2
Key 2
M/E 1
A
. . .
NOTE: The AUX 1-2 EFFECTS SEND ONLY buttons are functional
only when the Effects Send option is installed. (For Effects Send
operation, the system automatically configures the aux bus pair (A/B) as
a video/key pair. It is not necessary to do this in the Aux Bus Format
menu.)
Preview Only Select Buttons
The Preview Only buttons select the desired preview output to
be viewed on the switched preview monitor. When one of the
Preview Only buttons is pressed, the PVW bus delegate button
is automatically selected if it isn’t already on.
M/E 2
Pvw
M/E 1
Pvw
Choices available on the switched preview output are M/ E 1
Preview output and M/ E 2 Preview output
2-88
Preview/Aux Bus Source Select and Delegate Subpanel
Bus Delegate Buttons
The following delegation sources are available:
■
Any of the panel-selectable Aux buses (press one of the AUX
1... AUX 5 buttons)
■
■
The mask bus (press MASK)
The preview bus (press PVW)
One of the Bus Delegate buttons is always lit.
Preview Bus Selection
The PVW button enables the selection of the source to be viewed
on the switched preview monitor. The selection can be any
primary or secondary input, or any of the PVW ONLY crosspoint
sources (M/E1 PVW or M/E 2 PVW.
Pvw
Mask Bus Selection
Pressing the MASK button in the Bus Delegate group delegates the
source select buttons to select a source for the mask generators.
The MASK button high tallies when the mask bus is contributing
to the switcher Program output. The Mask Bus Pushbutton in the
Mask Subpanel must be selected.
Mask
2-89
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Aux Bus Selection
Aux buses 1 through 5 can be used as simple video routing
Aux
Aux
1
aux buses or for sending video and key to an external digital
device (DPM). Each bus consists of an “A” bus and a “B” bus
under E-MEM control. The “A” buses are for video only; the
“B” buses may be configured for either video or key.
... 5
To use the Aux bus as a simple routing bus:
For an “A” bus, press the appropriate Bus Delegate button to
select the desired Aux bus, then select any primary or re-entry
source on the PVW AUX row. To select a “B” bus, hold down
the Bus Delegate button while selecting the primary or re-
entry source.
To use an Aux bus for “effects looping” operation:
Select the layer of the desired M/ E on the Effects Send group
of buttons. This causes the selected M/ E output to be sent out
the Aux bus output. Concurrently, a primary switcher input
(that has previously been chosen to receive the return video
from the DPM or other external device) is automatically
routed to the chosen mixer layer for insertion of the processed
video. The primary input to be used for the return path is set
up in the Configuration menu.
2-90
Preview/Aux Bus Source Select and Delegate Subpanel
Effects Send – Looping Mode
Looping mode takes the output of an M/ E Keyer, sends it to an
external DPM, then returns the output of the DPM to the
Mix/ Wipe circuit of the same M/ E in the switcher. This provides
the effect of inserting a DPM right into the M/ E, between the
Keyer and the Mix/ Wipe system, as illustrated in Figure 2-18.
DPM
SWITCHER
Aux Bus 1 - 4
Effects Return Input
Key 1
Key 2
Key 1
M/E OUT
M/E
KEYER
M/E
MIXER
Key 2
A Bkgd
B Bkgd
A Bkgd
B Bkgd
Figure 2-18. Effects Send Looping Mode
1. To select Effects Send looping mode, first press the AUX BUS
button on the main menu panel, then press the PHYS AUX
SELECT soft button to select the Aux Bus to be looped. With the
EFX LOOP MODE button select EXT LOOP.
2. With one of the BUS DELEGATE buttons, select the (physical)
AUX BUS (1-2) that you want to use. With the switcher set up
as described previously for looping, the DPM output will
automatically be routed to the Mix/ Wipe system of the M/ E
whose Keyer output you sent to the DPM.
2-91
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
NOTE: The A and B bus selections apply only when in layered mode.
3. Select the Keyer output to be sent to the DPM by pressing one
of the EFFECTS SEND buttons on the PVW/ AUX row of
buttons (M/E 1 A through M/E2 Key2).
Effects Send – Non-Looping Mode
Non-Looping mode takes the output of an M/ E Keyer and sends
it to an external DPM. The output of the DPM may then be used
as an input to the switcher and may be selected on any bus on the
control panel. This allows the output of one Keyer to be
manipulated by the DPM, then used as a video or key input by the
other M/ E. See Figure 2-19.
To crosspoint via
primary inputs.
DPM
SWITCHER
Aux Bus 1-4
Key 1
Key 1
M/E OUT
M/E
KEYER
M/E
MIXER
Key 2
A Bkgd
B Bkgd
Key 2
A Bkgd
B Bkgd
Figure 2-19. Effects Send Non-Looping Mode
2-92
Preview/Aux Bus Source Select and Delegate Subpanel
1. To select Effects Send non-looping mode, first press the AUX
BUS button on the main menu panel, and then press the PHYS
AUX SELECT soft button to select the Aux Bus to be looped. With
the EFX LOOP MODE button select NO LOOP.
2. Select the Keyer output to be sent to the DPM by pressing one
of the EFFECTS SEND buttons on the PVW/ AUX row of
buttons (M/E 1 A through M/E 2 Key 2).
NOTE: The A and B bus selections apply only when in layered mode.
3. With one of the BUS DELEGATE buttons, select the (physical)
AUX BUS (1-2) that you want to use. With the switcher set up
as described previously for non-looping, the DPM output will
be routed to the previously-mapped crosspoint column on the
Source Select panel.
4. If the DPM output has been connected to a primary input and
mapped to one of the crosspoints, it may then be selected as a
source on any output bus on the Source Select panel.
Effects Send Loop with Frame Store
With previous software versions, the output of the Frame Store
option could not be returned to the M/ E mixer via the effects send
loop.
With Software Release 5.2, the Frame Store may now be used with
the effects send loop to capture the output from a keyer and return
the frozen image to the mixer of the same M/ E. This is similar to
using the effects send loop with an external DPM (Digital Picture
Manipulator).
NOTE: You must have the Frame Store option and the Effects Send
option installed in order for this feature to operate.
2-93
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Frame Store Looping Mode (Figure 2-20) takes the output of an
M/ E Keyer, sends it to the Frame Store module, then returns the
output of the Frame Store to the Mix/ Wipe circuit of the same
M/ E in the switcher. See Figure 2-20. This provides the effect of
inserting the Frame Store right into the M/ E, between the Keyer
and the Mix/ Wipe system.
SWITCHER
FRAME STORE
Effects Return Input
Aux Bus 4 (Model 4000)
or Aux Bus 2 (Model 2200)
Key
1
Key 1
Key 2
Key 2
M/E Out
M/E
M/E
A Bkgd
B Bkgd
A Bkgd
B Bkgd
KEYER
MIXER
Figure 2-20. Effects Send Frame Store Looping Mode
1. To select Frame Store looping mode, first press the Aux Bus
button on the main menu panel, then press the BUS SELECT
soft button in the Aux Bus Menu to select the Aux Bus to be
looped (AUX 2 for the Model 2200).
2. With the EFF LOOP MODE button, select FRAMESTORE. This
sends the output of the selected Keyer to the Frame Store
option module and connects the output of the Frame Store to
the Mix/ Wipe system of the same M/ E.
3. On the Switcher’s Pvw Aux bus, select the Keyer output to be
sent to the Frame Store by pressing Aux 2 Effects Send Only
button on the Model 2200.
NOTE: The Keyer A selections apply only when in layered mode.
2-94
Frame Store Subpanel
Open the Aux Bus Shaping menu by pressing Config on the top
menu panel, then select AUX BUS FORMAT> and AUX BUS
SHAPING> in the submenus.
Set the shaping of the effects send video to SHAPED by selecting
AUX BUS 4 for the Model 4000 or AUX BUS 2 for the Model 2200,
then selecting SHAPED with the VIDEO/KEY FMT button.
In Frame Store loop mode, operation of the Effects Send loop is the
same as for external looping mode (described in the User’s
Guide), except that manipulation of the Keyer output is done on
the Frame Stores panel, rather than by an external Digital Picture
Manipulator.
NOTE: The Video Store and Key Store need to be unfrozen.
Frame Store Subpanel
The primary functions of the Frame Store option are storage of
still video and key images and creation of dropshadows behind
keys. Controls for manipulation of these functions are found on
the Frame Store subpanel, shown below, and in the Frame Store
menu, described in Section Two.
2-95
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Frame Store
Drop
Shadow
Horizontal Vertical Opacity
Position Position
Field 1
Field 2
Freeze
Grab
Video
Store
Key
Store
Figure 2-21. Framestore Subpanel
Input Selection
Aux bus pair 2A/ 4B can be used to supply inputs to the frame
store video and key channels.
Output Routing
Video and key outputs from the frame store are routed to the
switcher crosspoint matrix and may be used as primary switcher
inputs. The video and key outputs are also routed to an output
module for use by external devices.
If the frame store is not in Freeze mode, its output is delayed by 2
fields from its input.
2-96
Frame Store Subpanel
Still Image Storage
Video and key can be frozen either separately or simultaneously
through the use of panel controls. In addition, the system has
read-before-write capability, so stills can be layered in a recursive
manner. The system accomplishes this by sending the output of
the frame store to the input of an M/ E for combination with
another image. A composite is generated that can be fed back to
the input of the frame store and re-frozen.
Frame Store Shadow Controls
The Shadow On button turns shadow mode on and off.
When shadow mode is on, the Horizontal POSITION and
Vertical POSITION knobs adjust the horizontal and vertical
offset of the shadow from the main key signal. A third
Drop
Shadow
Horizontal Vertical Opacity
Position Position
knob, OPACITY adjusts the opacity of the shadow.
Shadow On mode is functional only with primary video inputs
that have an associated linear key signal or an M/ E in layered
mode. No clip and gain adjustments are available to the user.
Shadow On mode does not reduce the bandwidth of the key
channel.
Shadow On is added to the key signal; the video output is
unaffected. Therefore the Frame Store video and key must be
composited on top of another layer in order to see the shadow.
2-97
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
The Video Store and Key Store buttons select whether the Frame
Store subpanel is assigned to the video channel or key channel.
One of these buttons is always lit, and Video Store and Key Store
may be selected simultaneously.
Video
Store
Key
Store
Operations that can be independently set for video and key
channels are as follows:
■
■
■
Freeze
Grab
Field 1 and Field 2
When Video Store and Key Store are delegated simultaneously, the
key channel settings are automatically aligned with the video
channel settings.
The Freeze button provides a freeze/ unfreeze function that
toggles between states. Press once to freeze, press a second time to
unfreeze. When enabled, this button stops data from being
written to the frame store, resulting in a frozen image.
Freeze
Grab
Pressing the Grab button updates the frame store with new input
data and freezes the new data. If freeze is off (moving video is
coming out of the frame store), pressing Grab turns on freeze.
Freeze can be turned off again by pressing the Freeze button. If
freeze is on and Grab is pressed, the frame store is unfrozen for
two fields and then frozen again. The Freeze button remains lit to
indicate that freeze is still on. Since the GRAB button initiates a
single one-time action, it lights only while the button is pressed
and for a short instant afterward.
2-98
Frame Store Subpanel
Field1 and Field 2 determine the field, or fields, that are read out
while the image is frozen. Either field may be selected, or both
may be selected at the same time. When unfrozen, the Field
buttons have no effect.
Field 1
Field 2
A full frame is always frozen, regardless of the state of these
buttons. This method of storage allows the operator to decide
between fields and frames after the image is frozen.
When an image is read from the frame store in field mode, the
“other” field is replicated from the selected field (indicated by the
illuminated Field button), if REPLICATE mode is selected in the
Video Store menu. If INTERPOLATE mode is selected in the menu,
the “other” field is interpolated from the selected field.
2-99
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Remote Aux Bus Panels
The Remote Aux Control Panels allow you to control the switcher
aux buses from a remote location. There are three models of the
(RUs) it occupies in the equipment rack.
■
■
■
1-RU panel (Option Part Number 088901-00)
2-RU panel (Option Part Number 088902-00)
3-RU panel (Option Part Number 088903-00)
The 1-RU and 2-RU panels (Figure 2-22) are functionally identical.
The 1-RU panel is designed for areas with very restricted space,
and has small crosspoint buttons containing LED tally lamps. The
2-RU panel has large crosspoint buttons with internal tally lamps.
Each of these panels must be set up to control a specific aux bus
and must have the setup changed to control another bus.
M/E M/E M/E
ON
AIR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 SHIFT
1
2
3
PGM
Grass Valley Group
1
13
2
3
5
6
7
8
10 11
12
4
9
14 15 16
M/E
2
M/E
3
M/E
1
PGM
SHIFT
18 19 20 21
24
22 23
17
Grass Valley Group
Figure 2-22. 1- RU and 2-RU Remote Aux Control Panels
2-100
Remote Aux Bus Panels
The 3-RU panel (Figure 2-23) has large buttons and is designed for
locations where it is desirable to operate more than one bus. This
panel will normally control all aux buses but can be set up to lock
out specific buses.
1
13
14 15 16
2
3
5
6
7
8
10 11
12
4
9
SOURCE
M/E
2
M/E
3
M/E
1
PGM
SHIFT
18 19 20 21
24
22 23
17
AUX
2A
AUX
1A
AUX
3A
AUX
4A
AUX
5A
AUX
6A
AUX
7A
AUX
8A
AUX
9A
DELEGATE
AUX
2B
AUX
1B
AUX
3B
AUX
4B
AUX
5B
AUX
6B
AUX
7B
AUX
8B
AUX
9B
Grass Valley Group
Figure 2-23. 3-RU Remote Aux Control Panel
As many as 32 Remote Aux Panels can be attached to one
switcher.
Source Selection
The Remote Aux Panels are designed to control 48
inputs (24 unshifted and 24 shifted). For use with the
2200, inputs 1 through 16 and SHIFT 1 through SHIFT 16
will be the active crosspoints. Input buttons 17 through
24 are disabled, as will the M/E 3 and PGM buttons.
1
24
. . .
Each crosspoint lamp on the 2-RU or 3-RU panel will high tally
when that input is on air. There is an ON AIR lamp on the one RU
panel which will illuminate to indicate that the selected input is on
air. The on-air tally can be permanently enabled on all panels.
2-101
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Rear Panel Switches
The rear panel includes a number of switches that control
operating modes, such as address, bus enable, delegate enable,
and test mode. These switches are set up during installation, as
described in the Installation section of the Model 2200 Installation
and Service Manual.
Remote Aux Operation
Operation of the Remote Aux Panel is identical to operation of the
local aux panel installed in the switcher control panel.
If the switcher setup identifies a bus pair (that is 2A and 2B) as
video and key, selecting a source on bus 2A will also change 2B.
To split the key selection will require use of the 3-RU panel or two
of the 1-RU or 2-RU panels (one set up for each bus).
More than one Remote Aux Control Panel can attempt to control
a single aux bus. When two or more panels controlling the same
bus have source buttons pressed, the panel with the highest
address will control the source.
Chop
The chop function switches rapidly between two inputs; this is a
test function and not a creative feature. To start the chop function,
press the first input button then double press the second input
button. to stop the chop button press any input button for that aux
bus on any aux panel. Chop must be enabled on the rear of the
Remote Aux Control Panel.
2-102
Remote Aux Bus Panels
Joy Stick Override
Joy stick override (JSO) causes the normal input selection on the
aux bus to be overridden and another input to be used in its place.
To activate joy stick override, press the JSO button; to return to
normal operation, release the JSO button.
Programming the Joy Stick Override
To program the JSO buttons:
1. Set the test mode switches to 12 (0011)
The test mode switches are on the rear of the Remote Aux Panel.
2. Press and hold the JSO switch to be programmed.
3. Press the desired source button on the Remote Aux Panel.
4. Release the JSO Switch.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for the other buttons.
6. Return test mode switch to 0 (0000).
2-103
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
Effects Subpanel
Most of the functions of the buttons shown in Figure 2-24 on the
Effects Subpanel are used exclusively with the Model 2200-i. For
the 2200-2, only the Near Side and Far Side functions are available
on this panel.
Freeze
Video
Freeze
Key
Near
Side
Far
Side
Source
Camera
Target
World
Axis
Lock
Rotate
Locate
3D
Size/
Locate˚
Knob
Control
Locate
Axis
Spin
Skew
Persp
Aspect
Post
Xform
Center
X
Y
Z
Figure 2-24. Effect Controls
2-104
Effects Subpanel
Front and back video image switching may be accomplished via
Aux Buses connected to a Kaleidoscope or Krystal DPM. The Near
Side and Far Side buttons (and the Near/ Far Aux Bus Menu
buttons; they work the same) are used to delgate the Front and
Back sides of the video image.
Near
Side
Far
Side
Video can have a “Front” and “Back” side. The same source
information can be applied to both sides of the video image, or the
two sides may be adjusted separately.
The Near side is the video image which is visible. The Far side is
the invisible side. The Front and Back may be rotated in any
manner, but the Near side is always the visible side; and the Far
side is always the invisible side.
For more information on Near/ Far Aux Bus Selections, see
Section 3, Menu Descriptions. For a detailed description of
Front/ Back and Near/ Far video processing, see Switcher
Concepts, Manipulating Video Concepts, in the Model 2200 User
Guide.
2-105
Section 2— Control Panel Descriptions
2-106
Menu Descriptions
3
Introduction
This section provides an overview of the Model 2200 menus, and
detailed descriptions of the menus and submenus and the
functions they provide. Menu trees in Section 4 show the overall
menu hierarchy.
Menu Display Subpanel
Many Model 2200 features are accessed via the Menu Display on
the upper control panel. Top-level menus are brought up on the
display by pressing the appropriate buttons at the left of the Menu
Display. (Figure 3-1) Except for the button in the lower left corner,
which is last menu, the two columns under Effects are are used
with the Krystal DPM functions (that is, the Model 2200-i) when
so configured.
Choices are made in the menus by pressing the “soft buttons”
below the display, and sometimes by making parameter
adjustments with the “soft knobs” at the right end of the display.
The buttons to the right of the display are for possible future
expansion and are not active at this time. These controls are called
“soft” because their functions change with different menus.
3-1
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Effect
Switcher
Effect˚
Config
Picture
Mixer
Config
M/E
Mode
Panel
Setup
Picture
Frame
Keyer
Chroma
Key
Effect
Oper
Key/
Stencil
Status
Wipe
E-MEM
Key
Frame
View
Run
Control
Input/
Output
Mask
Matte
Graphic
Display
Path
Aux
Bus
Frame
Store
Clear
Disk
Misc
Menu
Exit
Figure 3-1. Menu Display Subpanel
Top Level Menu Buttons
The menu system is divided into groups of function-related
menus. Any group can be accessed by pressing one of the buttons
on the Menu Display subpanel. This action brings up the
corresponding top-level menu, which assigns specific functions to
the soft buttons and knobs.
Except for the button in the lower left corner, which is last menu,
the two button columns under Effect are for future use and not
activated at this time. The LAST MENU button recalls the
previously chosen menu.
Illustrations and descriptions of the Switcher menus are provided
on the following pages.
3-2
Menu Display Subpanel
Effect
Switcher
Picture
Mixer
Config
M/E
Mode
Effect˚
Config
Panel
Setup
Picture
Frame
Keyer
Chroma
Key
Effect
Oper
Key/
Stencil
Status
Wipe
E-MEM
Key
Frame
View
Run
Control
Input/
Output
Mask
Matte
Graphic
Display
Path
Aux
Bus
Frame
Store
Clear
Menu
Disk
Misc
Soft (Function) Buttons and Soft Knobs
The buttons below the menu display implement the menu-
selected functions or access lower-level menus. A dedicated EXIT
button allows you to return to the menu one level higher on the
menu tree. Buttons are active only if a label appears above the
button.
NOTE: Buttons to the right of the menus are for possible future
expansion and are not active at this time.
The knobs at the right end of the menu display are available for
adjusting various parameters. These knobs are active only when
labels appear adjacent to them in the menu display. Many menus
do not require the use of the soft knobs.
3-3
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Menu Display and Graphics
In addition to specifying functions for the soft buttons and soft
knobs, the high-resolution menu display is sometimes used for
showing bit-mapped graphics. For example, menu-selectable
wipe patterns are displayed when the WIPE button is pressed.
Menu Delegation
The Model 2200 also delegates some menus on the Menu Display
screen to open when specific buttons on the subpanels are double-
pressed. (The second press must occur within a predetermined
amount of time.) Table 3-1 lists the buttons that support this
function.
NOTE: An opened menu is delegated, where appropriate, to the button
that opened the menu. For example, double-pressing the KEY 1
delegation button on the M/E 1 Keyer panel causes the keyer menu to
open and the menu controls to be delegated to keyer 1 of M/E 1.
3-4
Menu Display Subpanel
Table 3-1. Menu Delegation
Subpanel
Button Double-Pressed Delegated Menu
Comments
Transition
Keyer
BKGD B
M/E Mode menu
Keyer menu
KEY 1 and KEY 2
Keyer
(Layered Mode)
BKGD B, BKGD A,
KEY 1, and KEY 2
Keyer menu
Keyer
PRI PreSeT PaTTerN Wipe Modifier menu
or SEC PreSeT
Used to set PST PTN
DIRECTION
PaTTerN
Keyer
CHR KEY
Chroma Key menu
Chroma Key menu
Chroma Keyer
M/E 1 KEY 1 through
M/E 2 KEY 2
Wipe
Wipe
Wipe Pattern MENU
Wipe Pattern menu
Wipe Modifier menu
M/E 1 PRI through
M/E 2 SEC
Wipe
Wipe Pattern
TEXTURE
Wipe Texture menu
Source Select
Any of the following
delegated buses:
M/E 1 Key 1
M/E 1 Key 2
M/E 1 Key A
Any Primary or
Clear Key Memory
M/E 1 Key B
M/E 2 Key 1
Secondary Crosspoint menu (submenu under
Misc menu)
M/E 2 Key 2
M/E 2 Key A
M/E 2 Key B
Aux 1 through Aux 5 (if
configured as a video
and a key)
3-5
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Menu Descriptions
This section describes all system menus functions and the soft
buttons and soft knobs accessed by each. (The Configuration
menus are also described in the User Guide, with additional
information on external device configurations.)
The menus are presented in hierarchical order. After each top
level menu, the submenus under that top level menu are
described. All menus and submenus are listed in the local Table of
Contents at the beginning of this section. In addition, the menu
structure is also depicted in graphical form in Section Three,
Menu Trees.
The top level menus may be displayed by pressing the buttons at
the left of the Menu Display. Submenus are then brought up by
pressing the soft buttons at the bottom of the display. Each menu
function that will call up a submenu is indicated by a “>” symbol
at the end of the function name.
Some menus or submenus may also be brought up by automatic
menu delegation which is activated by double-pressing certain
buttons on the control panel. Auto delegation is discussed near
the beginning of Section One, Control Panel Descriptions.
NOTE: The following menu descriptions are for the two button columns
under Switcher. The Effects menu buttons are for future use and not
activated at this time.
3-6
Configuration Menus
Configuration Menus
The Configuration Menus are accessed by pressing the mixer
CONFig button on the Menu Display Subpanel. This displays the
Configuration menu and the sub-menu choices.
The Configuration Menus are used to set up the switcher to the
requirements of the site or job. The system parameters to be used
at a particular site are usually configured following installation of
assigning the sources to crosspoints, setting output levels, and
defining external interfaces. These menu items are accessed
through the Configuration menu.
NOTE: While only one configuration can be active at a time, it is
possible to store more than one configuration setup on disk and retrieve
it for later use. See Load File Menu on page 3-134.
CONFIGURATION MENU
/config
USER
PREFS >
SYSTEM
PARAM >
EXTERN
I/F >
AUX BUS
FORMATS>
INPUTS >
OUTPUTS >
3-7
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
The following items are accessed through the configuration
menus:
■
USER PREFS > — Set up operating parameters, such as Keyer
and Preview preferences.
■
■
■
Keyer Prefs
Preview Prefs
Define Defaults
■
■
SYSTEM PARAMS > — Set aspect ratio, the matte generator
limiter and the system clock.
■
■
Matte Gen Lim
Set Clock Menus (Date / Time)
INPUTS > — Define your inputs and name crosspoint buttons.
■
■
■
Map Inputs and Name Crosspoint Button
Chr Key Inputs
GPI Inputs
■
■
OUTPUTS > — Adjust the luminance and chroma limiter
settings on the switcher outputs.
EXTERN I/F > — Select or change settings for the Editor, DPM,
and Peripherals Interfaces connected to the Model 2200.
■
■
■
Editor I/ F
DPM I/ F
Peripheral I/ F
■
AUX BUS FORMAT> — Sets the “B” Aux Bus on Aux buses
3B— 5B to be either a separate video or key bus to accompany
the corresponding “A” Aux Bus. Set Aux Buses 1A through
2B (physical/ logical) for shaped or unshaped video output.
■
Aux Shaping
3-8
User Preferences
User Preferences
From the Configuration Menu, press the USER PREFS > button to
bring up the User Preferences Menu. Use the User Preferences
Menu to access the various user preference submenus described
below.
USER PREFS MENU
config/user prefs
LATCH
NORMAL
SHIFT
MODE
KEYER
PREFS >
PREVIEW
PREFS >
BEEPER
PREFS >
DEFINE
DEFAULTS >
1. Select either LATCH or NORMAL with the SHIFT MODE soft
button.
The LATCH selection allows you to lock any switcher
crosspoint bus into a shifted (UPPERCASE) state. This allows
ready access to those input sources mapped to shifted
crosspoints. (See “Setting Input Characteristics” on
page 3-21.)
3-9
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
With LATCH enabled on the User Preferences Menu, press and
hold the SHIFT button while selecting a crosspoint. The bus
containing that crosspoint is now locked into a shifted state.
Any crosspoint selected on this bus will now be a shifted
crosspoint. The SHIFT button light will remain ON while the
bus is in this state.
To unshift a bus, press and hold the SHIFT button. Select a
crosspoint button. The bus is now unshifted, and the SHIFT
button lamp is OFF.
1. Select the KEYER PREFS button to display the Keyer
Preferences menu.
2. Select the PREVIEW PREFS button to display the Preview
Preferences menu.
3. Select the Beeper PREFS> — button to display the Beeper
Preferences menu.
4. DEFINE DEFAULTS> — Opens the Define Defaults menu,
which allows you to change the default values used when the
switcher is turned on.
Press exit to return to the Configuration menu.
3-10
User Preferences
Keyer Preferences
From the User Preferences menu, press the KEYER PREFS> button
to display the Keyer Preferences menu:
KEYER PREFS MENU
config/user prefs/keyer prefs
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
DSK
DROP
KEY
MEMORY
CLEAR KEY
MEM>
1. Press the DSK DROP button to turn on or off the DSK drop
feature. Select either ON or OFF.
2. Press the KEY MEMORY button to turn on or off the key
memory feature. Select either ON or OFF.
3. CLEAR KEY MEM> — Opens the Clear Key Memory menu,
which allows you to clear the key memory settings for various
areas of the switcher.
Press EXIT to return to the User Preferences menu.
3-11
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Clear Key Memory Menu
From the Keyer Preferences menu, press the clear key mem>
button to display the Clear Key Memory menu:
CLEAR KEY MEMORY MENU
config / user prefs / keyer prefs / clear key mem
CURRENT
XPT
7
Press a button below to clear key memory for –
CLEAR XPT: the current xpt on the selected bus
CLEAR BUS: all xpts on the selected bus
CLEAR SECTION: all xpts on all buses in the selected section
CLEAR SWITCHER: all xpts in the switcher
M/E 1
M/E 2
DSK
A
B
AUX
KEY 1
KEY 2
MASK
SECTION
SELECT
BUS
SELECT
CLEAR
XPT
CLEAR
BUS
CLEAR
SECTION
CLEAR
SWITCHER
The Clear Key Memory menu selections are as follows:
SECTION SELECT and BUS SELECT — Select the area of the
switcher whose key memory you wish to clear.
After selecting the section and bus, press the specific
crosspoint desired on the selected bus. (The number of that
crosspoint will appear in the CURRENT XPT box in the menu.)
When AUX is selected, bus choices are 1 through 5. And when
MASK is selected, the BUS SELECT and CLEAR SECTION
choices disappear.
CLEAR XPT, CLEAR BUS, CLEAR SECTION, and CLEAR SWITCHER
— Perform the Clear operation for the selected memory area.
Press exit to return to the Keyer Preferences menu.
Press exit again to return to the User Preferences menu.
3-12
User Preferences
Preview Preferences
From the User Preferences menu, press the PREVIEW PREFS>
button to display the Preview Preferences menu:
PREVIEW PREFS MENU
config / user prefs / preview prefs
PUSH TO PREVIEW TIMEOUT
= 3 secs
M/E 1
M/E 2
PGM
ALL KEYERS
OFF
LOOKAHEAD
ALL KEYERS
DELEG KEYER
ON
LOOKAHEAD
PGM
M/E 2
OFF
OFF
PVW
SELECT
PVW
MODE
DIM
PVW
PUSH TO
PVW
1. Select the preview from M/ E 1 or M/ E 2 using the PVW
SELECT button.
2. Use the PVW MODE button to select the preview mode desired
for the selected switcher subsystem:
NOTE: The optional M/E Preview Mezzanine must be installed for each
M/E in order to select LOOKAHEAD Preview Mode. This selection will
not be displayed in the menu if the mezzanine board is not installed.
The Preview Mode choice depends on how many monitors you
have per M/ E, and how you wish to use them (see Figure 3-2).
LOOKAHEAD— Use to review what is going on-air next.
Always shows the next transition of the selected M/ E.
3-13
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
PGM — Use this selection to have the PGM output of the M/ E
displayed on the Preview monitor. (Useful if your PGM
monitor goes down — signal is feed from the switched PVW
output.)
PGM
M/E 2 PGM Out
Switcher
Fixed
PVW
Lookahead
M/E 2 PVW Out
2 Monitors per M/E
PGM Out - Low Tally
Lookahead - Hi Tally
PVW Out
AUTO
Switcher
1 Monitor per M/E
Switcher
PVW Out
PGM
Fixed PGM
(In effect, no PVW
function enabled.)
1 Monitor per M/E
Figure 3-2. . Preview Mode Configurations
3-14
User Preferences
3. Press the DIM PVW button to dim the preview of all keyers
using a mask in that M/ E or to turn off the preview dim
function so that the preview never dims regardless of
masking.
4. Assign one of the following Dim Preview modes:
ALL KEYERS — the preview of all keyers using a mask in that
M/ E will dim the Preview monitor.
DELEG KEYR — only the keyer which is currently delegated
and doing a mask in that M/ E or DSK will dim the Preview
monitor.
OFF — preview never dims, regardless of masking.
5. Press the push to pvm button to enable/ disable the push to
preview mode for the entire switcher. Hold down the key
delegate button (for example key 1 or key 2 on the Keyer
panel) of the appropriate keyer for 1/ 2 second or more to
display the M/ E look-ahead preview along with the selected
keyer output on the switched preview monitor.
When the key delegate button is released, the preview display
remains on for a programmed time-out period, as set by the
Push to Preview Timeout soft knob, before reverting to its
original state.
Push to Preview Timeout— Sets how long the preview will
remain on after you have released the key delegate button.
The default value for the auto preview is 3 seconds. Any
adjustments to clip or gain resets the time-out, thus
maintaining the auto preview mode while making clip and
gain adjustments.
Press EXIT to return to the User Preferences menu.
3-15
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Beeper Preferences
You may wish to customize the beeper alert system. Beeper
preferences are selected on the Configuration/ User Preferences
Menu/ Beeper Preferences Menu shown below.
BEEPER ON/OFF — Use to enable or disable the beeper alert
system.
WARNING — Use to enable or disable beeper warnings. (For
example: On the Keyer Copy Menu, if you try to copy M/ E 1
Key 1 to M/ E 1 Key 1 (copy a key onto itself) you will get a
beep with Beeper Prefs selection: WARNING ON.)
END OF KNOB — Enable or disable the beeper alert that
sounds when the knob is turned to either end of its’ range.
KNOB CENTER — Enable or disable the beeper alert that
sounds when the knob is turned to the center of its’ range.
INACTIVE KNOB — Enable or disable the beeper alert for
knobs “turned off” during the current switcher state.
BEEPER PREFS MENU
config/user prefs/beeper prefs
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
BEEPER
ON/OFF
END OF
KNOB
KNOB
CENTER
INACTIVE
KNOB
WARNING
3-16
User Preferences
Define Defaults Menu
From the User Preferences menu, press the define defaults>
button to display the Define Defaults menu: This menu allows
you to change the default values that are stored in memory and
used when the switcher is turned on or the CLEAR WORK BUFR
button is pressed.
DEFINE DEFAULTS MENU
config / user prefs / define defaults
Set Default State to Current Switcher State. All M/Es will use ME1 settings
Set Default State to GVG Factory Default.
ME1
ME2
M/E
SELECT
GVG
DEFAULT
SET
DEFAULT
The Define Defaults menu selections are as follows:
M/E SELECT — Selects the M/ E whose settings are to be used
during power-up. (Only one set of values is stored for the M/ Es,
therefore both M/ Es use the same values at boot-up.) The
switcher panel (including the selected M/ E) is used to set up the
switcher default values.
SET DEFAULT — Enters the new default values.
GVG DEFAULT — Restores the factory-set default values to the
switcher.
Press exit to return to the User Preferences menu.
Press exit again to return to the Configuration menu.
3-17
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
System Parameters
From the Configuration menu, press the System parameters>
button to bring up the System Parameters menu.
SYSTEM PARAMETERS MENU
config/system param
XMITABLE
VALID RGB
BOTH
FIELD 1
FIELD 2
NONE
4 X 3
16 X 9
NONE
FIELD
DOMINANCE
ASPECT
RATIO
MATTE
GEN LIM
SET
CLOCK >
1. ASPECT RATIO — Soft button may be set to either the 4 x 3 or
16 x 9 setting, depending on your installation requirements.
2. FIELD DOMINANCE — (FIELD DOMINANCE set to NONE),
selection changes become effective at the beginning of the
next field (immediately after the functions have been
changed).
Using Field Dominance
If the Model 2200 output is going to be recorded onto tape that will
later be edited along with other tape, it is important that changes
take place consistently on the same field. They can occur on either
Field 1 or Field 2 of the frame, but need to be on the same field
every time. If this is not done, there will be a “flash” at the edit in
the resulting taped video.
3-18
System Parameters
With FIELD 1 selected as the dominant field, if a change takes
place just prior to Field 1, the change will become effective at the
beginning of Field 1. But if the change takes place prior to Field 2,
the change will be delayed by one field so that it also becomes
effective at the beginning of the next Field 1. This way, all changes
will be synchronized to take place at the beginning of Field 1.
Similarly, if FIELD 2 were selected as the dominant field, those
changes that take place prior to Field 1 would be delayed until
Field 2.
If you are recording the switcher output on video tape and will be
doing post-production editing of the tape, it is recommended that
you set Field Dominance for a specific field (either FIELD 1 or
FIELD 2), and leave it at that setting. This will ensure that all
changes will take effect consistently on the same field.
If an Editor or a GPI trigger initiates one of these functions, it will
produce the same effect as a control panel change. That is, the
initiation of any of these functions will be delayed until the
beginning of the selected dominant field.
3. Set the matte generator chroma limiting algorithm by
toggling through the available choices. The MATTE GEN LIM
selections are:
XMITABL — Prevents the total signal (luminance and
chrominance) from exceeding the NTSC transmission
standard.
VALID RGB — Limits colors to those which generate red,
green, and blue values within the 0 to 100% range.
BOTH — Selects a valid RGB color limiter which also prevents
the encoded signal envelope from exceeding NTSC
transmission level. This is the system default mode.
NONE — Turns off all algorithm methods for matte generator
limiting.
4. Press SET CLOCK> to open the Set Clock menu to set the
system time and date.
Press exit to return to the Configuration menu.
3-19
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Set Clock Menu
From the System Parameters menu, press the SET CLOCK > soft
button to display the Set Clock menu. If the date and/ or time are
incorrect, they may be reset as follows:
SET CLOCK MENU
YEAR
=1994
config/system param/set clock
MONTH
= March
CLOCK
April 1, 1994
8:31 AM
DAY
= 4
Press "CONFIRM" button
to update the clock
setting.
DATE
TIME
SELECT
CONFIRM
1. Set the date by selecting DATE with the SELECT button and
turning the soft knobs to select the appropriate YEAR, MONTH,
and DAY.
2. Press the CONFIRM button to enter the new date.
3. Set the time by selecting TIME with the SELECT button and
using the soft knobs to select the HOUR, MINUTE, and
SECOND.
3-20
System Parameters
HOUR
= 5 PM
SET CLOCK MENU
config / system param / set clock
MINUTE
= 7
CLOCK
December 5 1993
5:07:53 PM
Press "CONFIRM" button
to update the clock
setting
SECOND
= 0
DATE
TIME
SELECT
CONFIRM
4. Press the CONFIRM button to enter the new time.
Press EXIT to return to the System Parameters menu.
Press EXIT again to return to the Configuration menu.
Setting Input Characteristics
Primary video and key inputs to the switcher are numbered 1
through 32 (16 unshifted and 16 shifted). Any of these inputs can
be treated as either a video or key signal. During the installation
procedure, each of the 32 input buses is assigned a video signal, a
key signal, and a chroma key signal. All inputs are defined by
function, name, crosspoint, input number, and signal format.
3-21
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Each input, including internally generated signals such as black
and background, can be mapped to any vertical column of source
select (“crosspoint”) buttons. You may determine the input
assignments and the characteristics of the input signals through
the use of the Configuration submenus, as described in the
following procedures.
NOTE: The external video and key assignments are set up following
installation to correspond to the video and key inputs connected to the
frame. These assignments should never be changed by the operator.
Configuring the Black Crosspoint
BLACK
When mapping inputs to pushbuttons, one of the choices in the
Configuration menu is BLACK, and another choice is NONE. Your
selection will have an effect on how PRESET BLACK operates, and
what will happen in the event the controller CPU fails.
When the first transition during a preset black operation is
completed, the left most BLACK crosspoint is automatically
selected on the A Background bus. If black has not been assigned
to any pushbutton, the PRESET BLACK button is disabled and the
preset black function is not permitted. If a pushbutton is assigned
to NONE, black appears when that button is selected; however the
preset black function will not use this as the BLACK crosspoint.
Processor Failure
The BLACK crosspoint is also important in the situation where the
Controller main CPU fails while one of the M/ Es is performing a
re-entry. When it fails, the M/ Es are required to abandon their re-
entry crosspoints and select BLACK on the same bus. In the case
where black was never assigned to a pushbutton, the M/ E selects
the left most crosspoint on the bus.
3-22
Inputs Menu
Inputs Menu
From the Configuration menu, press the INPUTS > button to access
the Inputs menu:
INPUTS MENU
100% COLOR BARS
TOP
config / inputs
75% COLOR BARS
HORIZ TIMING
MULTIPULSE
PULSE & BAR
CHR KEY TEST
H RAMP
TEST SIGNAL
WALKING BITS
100% COLOR BARS
75% COLOR BARS
HORIZ TIMING
MULTIPULSE
BOTTOM
TEST SIGNAL
PULSE & BAR
CHR KEY TEST
H RAMP
WALKING BITS
ANLG VIDEO ANLG KEY AANNLLGG IINNPPUUTT
INPUTS > INPUTS >
TTIIMMIINNGG >>
MAP
INPUTS >
CHR KEY
INPUTS >
GPI
INPUTS >
1. Press MAP INPUTS to select the format (shaped or unshaped)
for each video/ key input.
From the map inputs menu, press name xpt button to name
each crosspoint (up to nine letters may be used).
2. Press CHR KEY INPUTS to define format and setup for the two
optional Chroma Key analog inputs. (Menu will depend on
setting of FIELD RATE switch on the Sync Generator Module
in Cell A10 of the switcher frame).
3. Press GPI INPUTS to program up to eight GPI inputs to trigger
Model 2200 functions, such as E-MEM registers.
4. Use the top and bottom soft knobs to select the test pattern
signal for the top and bottom of the screen.
Press exit to return to the Configuration menu.
3-23
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Map Inputs Menu
From the Inputs menu, press the MAP INPUTS> button to select the
Map Inputs menu. This menu selects which physical input (input
connection on frame) is used as a video, key, or chroma key on
each crosspoint.
MAP INPUTS MENU
VIDEO INPUT
= 4
config/inputs/map inputs
(DIG SER/RGB/SETUP)
KEY INPUT
= 1
(DIG SER/8 BIT/SETUP/SYNC)
XPT BUTTON XPT BUTTON
NUMBER
NAME
CHROMA KEY INPUT
= NONE
38
(INTERNAL)
(SHIFT-14)
UNSHAPED
VIDEO
Use the Preset Bus to select button number.
SHAPED
VIDEO
LOG CHANNEL
PHYS CHANNEL
VIDEO/
KEY FMT
NAME XPT
BUTTON >
LOG/PHYS
ASSIGNMENT
1. On the M/ E 2 B Bus, press the crosspoint button whose
sources you wish to select.
2. With the log/phy assignment button, select phys inputs.
3. Use the appropriate soft knob to select the desired type of
input. Note that inputs formats are displayed when selecting
input type.
NOTE: Undefined buttons default to black.
3-24
Inputs Menu
4. If mapping a chroma key input, use the chroma key input soft
knob to assign the chroma key type for the currently selected
crosspoint button.
5. Use the video/key fmt button to assign whether the input will
use the shaped video or unshaped video format.
6. Refer to “DPM Map Aux Bus menu” under “DPM Setup,” in
this section, for use of the log channel function of the log/phy
assignment button.
7. After mapping the input, you may name the crosspoint by
pressing name xpt button>. The Name Xpt Button menu
appears as shown next.
8. Repeat steps 1 through 7 for all inputs.
Press the EXIT button to return to the Inputs menu.
3-25
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Name Crosspoint Button Menu
From the Map Inputs menu, select NAME XPT BUTTON> to display
the Name Crosspoint Button menu.
NAME XPT BUTTON MENU
space
'
(
)
-
/
*
:
.
config/inputs/map inputs/name xpt button
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
String Register
Camera
Save
String
Get
String
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
XPT BUTTON NUMBER
Button Name
Cam 2
38
(SHIFT- 14)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Use the Preset Bus to select button number.
Character =
G
CURSOR
BACK
ACCEPT
CHAR
CURSOR
FORWRD
DELETE
CHAR
SAVE
STRING
GET
STRING
ACCEPT
NAME
1. Move the cursor with the Cursor Back and Cursor Forward
buttons
2. Select each character by turning the soft knobs. Use the
ACCEPT CHAR button to accept the new character. Up to 9
characters may be used.
3. Press ACCEPT NAME to store the name. The system
automatically returns to the Map Inputs menu.
The first four characters of the name will appear in the display
panel located between the two M/ E‘s.
4. Save String moves the name into the string register Get String
moves the string into the button name.
The string register is a holding place which allows the button
name to be changed or recalled easily.
Press exit to return to the Inputs menu.
3-26
Inputs Menu
Chroma Key Inputs Menu
From the Inputs menu, press the CHR KEY INPUTS > button to
select the Chroma Key Inputs menu; if optional Chroma Keyer is
installed.
CHROMA KEY INPUTS MENU
config/inputs/chr key inputs
COARSE
TIMING = 24.25 CLOCKS
=(24.250 µsecs)
FINE
RGB
BETA
YUV
M II
OFF
ON
INPUT
1
INPUT
2
INPUT
3
INPUT
4
INPUT
5
INPUT
6
SETUP
INPUT
FORMAT
1. Select the chroma key input to adjust by pressing the INPUT 1
or iNPUT 2 button.
2. Select the correct format for that input using the INPUT
FORMAT and setup buttons.
NOTE: When the input is set to YUV the setup button will not appear.
3. Adjust the coarse and fine timing for each chroma key input.
the range of the (coarse) soft knob is -256 clocks to +256 clocks
(1 clock = 69.84 nsecs). Use the fine soft knob to adjust the
factional value from.000 to 0.999 clocks.
Press exit to return to the Inputs menu.
3-27
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
GPI Inputs Menu
From the Inputs menu, press the gpi inputs> button to select the
GPI Inputs menu.
Eight GPI inputs are provided. All of these accept pulse-type
inputs except Aux Tally Back, which is level-sensitive. Use the
GPI Inputs menu to set GPI assignments for signals that can be
used to trigger Model 2200 functions. These assignments must
correspond to the physical GPI connections described in the
Installation section of the Model 2200 Installation and Service
Manual.
FUNCTION SELECT
GPI INPUTS MENU
config/inputs/gpi in
(AUTO TRANS)
M/E 2
M/E 2
M/E 1
AUTO TRAN PST BLACK
AUTO TRAN
GPI 1
GPI 2
GPI 3
GPI 4
GPI 5
GPI 6
GPI 7
GPI 8
M/E 1 AUTO TRAN
GPI DISABLED
GPI DISABLED
GPI DISABLED
GPI DISABLED
GPI DISABLED
GPI DISABLED
GPI DISABLED
When the desired function is selected,
press PROGRAM GPI button to set the
selected GPI input to the
selected function.
Choose from these 6 buttons to select various
categories of GPI functions. Then use the
FUNCTION SELECT knob to select a function.
M/E 1
AUTO TRAN ?
GPI 1
GPI
SELECT
KF
EFFECT
AUTO
TRANS
FRAME
STORE
PROGRAM
GPI
MISC
CUT
E-MEM
The types of GPI assignments currently available are
Miscellaneous (Aux Tallies), Keyframe Effects, Auto Transitions,
Cuts, E-MEM registers, and Frame Store as indicated by the
button labels at the bottom for the display window. One of these
functions is always selected. The selected function is indicated in
parentheses under the function select knob label.
1. To assign the GPI inputs, first press gpi select to select the
desired input.
3-28
Inputs Menu
2. Select the type of category to be assigned (Misc, Keyframe
Effects, etc.) by pressing the appropriate soft button.
3. Turn the FUNCTION SELECT knob to assign a specific function
(Aux Tally, etc.).
4. After the desired function has been selected for each GPI,
press program gpi to enter the selection, which is indicated in
the display table.
The following categories are available for assignment:
MISC — Enables selection of the Aux Tally Back function, or
allows the selected GPI input to be disabled.
AUXTALLY — Allows an external device to control the aux bus
tally level (high or low). The AUX BUS soft knob selects the
appropriate aux bus.
DISABLE GPI — Causes any signal applied to the selected GPI
input to be ignored.
kf effect — Enables selection of the Keyframe GPI function.
The following transitions may be triggered with GPI pulses:
■
run, rewind, auto run, and reverse
AUTO TRANS — Enables selection of the Auto Transition GPI
function. The following transitions may be triggered with GPI
pulses:
■
M/E 1, M/E 2, and M/e 2 PST BLK
CUT — Enables selection of the Cut GPI function. The following
cuts may be triggered by the GPI:
■
M/E 1, and M/E 2
E-MEM — Enables selection of the E-MEM GPI function. The
following E-MEM functions may be triggered by the GPI:
■
RECALL ME 1, RECALL ME 2, RECALL MSTR, AUTO
RECALL, EFX DISSOLV, and SEQUENCE. The REGISTER
soft knob selects the register for E-MEM recalls.
FRAME STORE — Enables selection of the Frame Store GPI
function. Triggerable functions are as follows:
■
VIDEO GRAB, KEY GRAB, and MASK GRAB
Press exit twice to return to the Configuration Menu.
3-29
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Outputs Menu
Select OUTPUTS> from the Configuration Menu. The Outputs
Menu shown below displays.
OUTPUTS MENU
config/outputs
M/E1 PGM
BOTH
PEAK
PEAK
M/E2 PGM
PEAK WHITE
OFF
PEAK WHITE
PEAK BLACK
OFF
M/E 1 PGM
BOTH
PEAK
OUTPUT
SELECT
LUM
LIMITER
CHROM
LIMITER
1. Select the desired output with the OUTPUT SELECT button.
2. With the LUM LIMITER button choose one of the following
luminance limiting conditions (does not apply to reentries):
PEAK WHITE — the luminance level is limited at peak white
PEAK BLACK — the luminance level is limited at standard
black
BOTH — keeps the luminance levels between standard black
and peak white
OFF — does not limit luminance levels
3. Use the CHROMA LIMITER button to set the chrominance to the
following conditions:
PEAK — keeps the chrominance between 100% chroma
saturation levels
OFF — allows chrominance levels to vary between the full
legal D1 limits
Press EXIT to return to the Configuration menu.
3-30
External Interface Menu
External Interface Menu
From the Configuration menu, select EXTERN I/F> to bring up the
External Interface menu:
Parameters for external interfaces such as the editor, GPI, DPM
interfaces, and other peripheral interfaces can be set through the
External Interfaces menu.
EXTERNAL INTERFACE MENU
config/extern if
EDITOR
I/F>
DPM
I/F>
PERIPHERAL
I/F>
GPI
OUTPUTS>
Press the EDITOR I/F> button to advance to the Editor Interface
menu.
Press the DPM I/F> button to advance to the DPM Interface menu.
Press the PERIPH I/F> button to advance to the Peripheral Interface
menu.
Press the GPI Outputs> button to advance to the GPI Outputs
menu.
Press exit to return to the Configuration menu.
3-31
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Editor Interface Menu
From the External Interface menu press the EDITOR I/F> button to
select the Editor Interface menu:
EDITOR INTERFACE MENU
SWITCHER ADDRESS
= 30 hex
config/extern if editor if
2400
4800
9600
ODD
EVEN
NONE
19200
38400
BAUD
PARITY
1. Select the desired switcher editor port BAUD rate with the
BAUD button. The choices are listed below:
■
■
■
■
■
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400 (Typical setting for Grass Valley editors.)
2. Select the desired parity for the switcher editor port with the
PARITY button. The choices are listed below:
■
■
■
ODD (Typical setting for Grass Valley editors.)
EVEN
NONE
Press the EXIT button to return to the External Interface menu.
3-32
External Interface Menu
DPM Setup Menu
From the External Interface Menu, press DPM I/F> to bring up the
DPM Setup Menu.
The DPM type, aux bus control, channel routing selection, effects
send delay, and control delay for each of (up to) four DPM devices
is indicated in the table in the display. The menu displayed
references a Model 2200-2i integrated DPM system.
DPM SETUP MENU
config / extern if / dpm setup
EFF SEND DELAY
= 5 fields
EFF SEND CONTROL
E-MEM LEVELS
DELAY
DELAY
DEVICE 1
DEVICE 2
DEVICE 3
DEVICE 4
INTERNAL
NONE
BOTH
OFF
5
2
2
2
6
0
0
0
CHAN 1, CHAN 2, GLOBAL and CAMERA
DPM 2
none (no E-MEM control)
none (no E-MEM control)
NONE
OFF
NONE
OFF
WARNING: Changing DPM TYPE may change
channel routing, control devices and aux bus mapping.
CONTROL DELAY
= 6 fields
KSCOPE
KRYSTAL
OTHER
SWR IN
SWR OUT
BOTH
NONE
DEVICE 1
INTERNAL
OFF
CHANNEL
ROUTING
DEVICE
SELECT
DPM
TYPE
DPM MAP
AUX BUSES > INPUTS >
DPM MAP
NOTE: For information on assigning aux buses to DPMs, be sure to
read “DPM Configurations” in the Startup section of the Model 2200
User Guide.
For Kaleidoscope:
1. Set the DPM TYPE to KSCOPE.
2. Turn the EFF SEND DELAY soft knob to select 2 fields. It is
important that this delay be set correctly.
3-33
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
3. Set the CONTROL DELAY to 6 fields
4. PORT ASSIGN is set automatically to PORT A1. The baud rate
for Port A1 is fixed at 307 Kbaud.
5. Set CHANNEL ROUTING for BOTH or SWR IN, depending upon
your system configuration, as described in “DPM
Configurations” in the Model 2200 User Guide.
6. Press the CPU Reset button through the hole in the door of the
switcher frame.
Communication should now be established between the Model
2200 and Krystal.
For Krystal:
1. Set the DPM TYPE to KRYSTAL. The values denoted in Steps
2 through 4 are set automatically.
2. Turn the EFF SEND DELAY soft knob to select 5 fields. It is
important to set this delay correctly.
3. Turn the CONTROL DELAY soft knob to select 6 fields.
4. PORT ASSIGN is set automatically to PORT A1. The baud rate
for Port A1 is fixed at 307 K baud.
5. Set CHANNEL ROUTING for BOTH or SWR IN, depending upon
your system configuration, as described previously under
“DPM Configurations.”
6. Reset the Control Processor in the Model 2200 Signal
Processor frame. This is done by opening the front door of the
Processor and pressing the RESET button located near the
top of the Control Processor module.
Communication should now be established between the Model
2200 and Krystal.
3-34
External Interface Menu
For a DPM-700:
1. Set the DPM TYPE to OTHER FIXED.
2. Turn the EFF SEND DELAY soft knob to select 2 fields. It is
important that this be set correctly.
The CONTROL DELAY soft knob has no effect with the DPM-
700.
3. Set PORT ASSIGN to NONE.
4. Set CHANNEL ROUTING to OFF.
For devices which must be set up manually:
1. Program all other required parameters
2. Set EFF SEND DELAY to 0
3. Select BLACK on the Aux Bus feeding the external device
NOTE: A delay has been introduced when changing DPM TYPE. This
delay allows a new DPM TYPE to be chosen without cycling through
intermediate DPM Types. Once the desired solution has been made, the
new DPM TYPE will be set 2 seconds later.
4. Turn the M/ E Effects Send button on and off and look for a
flash of the wrong video (BLACK) as Effects Send is turned
on. (The flash will appear on the M/ E output for the Effects
Send you selected.)
5. Increase the EFF SEND DELAY one field at a time until there is
no video flash when turning on Effects Send.
NOTE: Increasing the EFF SEND DELAY any further will not change
the Effects Send appearance. It will, however, delay the entry into Effects
Send unnecessarily.
3-35
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
DPM K’SCOPE Sources Menu
The DPM K’Scope Sources Menu, shown below, allows you to
map Kaleidoscope video source crosspoints to your switcher
video source crosspoints. The first time you use this menu you
must set user defaults. After setting defaults you can map
crosspoints as required.
Map Kaleidoscope video source crosspoints as follows:
1. From the DPM Setup Menu, press DPM K’SCOPE SOURCES>
to access the DPM K’Scope Sources Menu.
2. Push SET DEFAULTS to set user defaults.
3. Scroll the menu table selection fields with the K’SCOPE
BUTTON soft knob. Highlight the K’Scope button number you
want to map.
4. Use the SWITCHER BUTTON soft knob to set the desired
switcher video source crosspoint to the Kaleidoscope video
source crosspoint
DPM K'SCOPE SOURCES MENU
config/extern if/dpm setup/dpm k'scope sources
DIAL IN SWITCHER
XPT BUTTON FOR
K'SCOPE SOURCE
BUTTON
SWR BTN
1
SWR BTN
SWR BTN
23
K'SCOPE BTN
K'SCOPE BTN
11
K'SCOPE BTN
22
12
13
14
15
0
1
2
23
24
25
2
3
12
13
24
S/1
S/2
S/3
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
14
15
16
16
17
18
26
27
28
29
30
31
4
5
6
7
8
S/4
17
18
19
20
S/5
19
20
21
22
ME/1
ME/2
PGM
K'SCOPE BUTTON
=
9
10
11
21
10
SWITCHER BUTTON
=
SET
DEFAULTS
3-36
External Interface Menu
DPM Map Aux Buses Menu
From the DPM Setup menu, press DPM MAP AUX BUSES> to
access the DPM Map Aux Buses menu:
NUMBER OF CHANNELS
DPM MAP AUX BUSES MENU
config/extern if/dpm setup/dpm map aux buses
= 2
Connection of physical AUX buses
to physical channels
CHANNEL 1
= AUX 6
MISC
AUX 4
AUX 5
AUX 8
-
-
-
-
-
CHAN 1 CHAN 2
CHAN 3 CHAN 4 CHAN 5 CHAN 6 CHAN 7 CHAN 8
DPM 1
DPM 2
DPM 3
DPM 4
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
AUX 6
AUX 7
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DPM 2
DEVICE
SELECT
The Aux bus-to-device assignment for each DPM device is shown
in the table in the display.
1. Select the desired device by pressing the DEVICE SELECT
button
2. For Kaleidoscope, rotate the NUMBER OF CHANNELS knob,
assigning aux buses 1 through n to this device number. Note
that a Kaleidoscope device (or other poolable DPM) does not
allow you to select a starting aux bus number other than aux
bus 1, and that all aux buses assigned to this Kaleidoscope
must be in consecutive order.
3-37
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
3. For DPM 100 or 700 set the NUMBER OF CHANNELS and
CHANNEL 1= soft knobs as appropriate for your installation.
Assigning an aux bus to a DPM level saves the parameters under
the DPM level rather than the MISC level for E-MEM operations.
Kaleidoscope Connection Examples
Some examples of connecting switcher(s) to Kaleidoscope are
described next. See examples 1 and 2 below.
Example 1: Switcher-to-Kaleidoscope Configuration
Physical Channel
A
B
C
Aux
Bus
1
2
D
E
Switcher
F
Kaleidoscope
Figure 3-3. Switcher-to-Kaleidoscope Cabling
3-38
External Interface Menu
Example 2: Two Switchers-to-1 Kaleidoscope Configuration
Physical
Channel
Aux
Bus
1
A
2
B
C
Switcher 1
D
E
Aux
Bus
1
2
F
G
Switcher 2
H
Kaleidoscope
Figure 3-4. Switcher-to-Kaleidoscope Cabling
3-39
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
The following menu shows how you might set up the DPM Map
Aux Buses Menu for use with Kaleidoscope.
NUMBER OF CHANNELS
= 4
DPM MAP AUX BUSES MENU
config/extern if/dpm setup/dpm map aux buses
Connection of physical AUX buses
to physical channels
FIRST CHANNEL
= CHAN E
-
-
MISC
AUX 5
AUX 6
AUX 7
-
-
-
PHYS CHAN
CHAN A CHAN B CHAN C CHAN D CHAN E CHAN F CHAN G CHAN H
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DPM 1
DPM 2
DPM 3
DPM 4
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DPM 1
DEVICE
SELECT
Press the EXIT button to return to the DPM Setup menu.
3-40
External Interface Menu
DPM Map Inputs Menu
From the DPM Setup menu, press DPM MAP INPUTS> to bring up
the DPM Map Inputs menu.
VIDEO INPUT
DPM MAP INPUTS MENU
config/extern if/dpm setup/dpm map inputs
= 19
VIDEO INPUT KEY INPUT
PHYSICAL
CHAN 1-PRI
CHAN 2
LOGICAL
6
19
29
-
23
42
63
-
KEY INPUT
= 42
CHAN 3
CHAN 4
DPM 2
CHAN 5
-
-
CHAN 6
-
-
CHAN 7
-
-
SECONDARY
-
-
DPM 1
DPM 2
DPM 3
DPM 4
CHAN 2
DPM
SELECT
CHANNEL
SELECT
Set up the Kaleidoscope video and key return input numbers as
follows:
1. Select the desired device (1 through 4) by pressing the DPM
SELECT button.
2. Select the desired DPM channel by pressing the CHANNEL
SELECT button.
3-41
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
3. Use the VIDEO INPUT knob to assign an input (1 - 32) to the
Model 2200 physical channel to which the Kaleidoscope
physical channel video return is connected.
4. Use the KEY INPUT knob to assign an input (1 - 32) to the
Model 2200 physical channel to which the Kaleidoscope
physical channel video return is connected.
5. Set up the aux bus format as described under the Aux Bus
Format heading later in this section. Make sure that any aux
buses assigned to Kaleidoscope are configured for KEY
operation of their B aux buses.
NOTE: It is not necessary to set the format for aux buses that are to be
used for Effects Send. When Effects Send is selected, the B bus of each
selected aux bus is automatically configured as a key.
6. Press the exit button to return to the DPM Setup menu.
7. Press EXIT again to return to the External Interface menu.
3-42
External Interface Menu
Mapping DPM Returns
Complete the DPM Setup by assigning the DPM channel returns.
1. Bring up the Map Inputs menu by pressing the following
buttons: Mixer CONFG, INPUTS>, MAP INPUTS>
2. Press a crosspoint button on the M/ E 2 B background bus to
select the crosspoint whose input mapping is to be changed.
3. Select LOG CHANNEL with the LOG/PHYS ASSIGNMENT
button.
VIDEO INPUT
DPM MAP INPUTS MENU
config/extern if/dpm setup/dpm map inputs
= 19
VIDEO INPUT KEY INPUT
PHYSICAL
CHAN 1-PRI
CHAN 2
LOGICAL
6
19
29
-
23
42
63
-
KEY INPUT
= 42
CHAN 3
CHAN 4
DPM 2
CHAN 5
-
-
CHAN 6
-
-
CHAN 7
-
-
SECONDARY
-
-
DPM 1
DPM 2
DPM 3
DPM 4
CHAN 2
DPM
SELECT
CHANNEL
SELECT
4. Rotate the VIDEO INPUT knob to assign the desired DPM
number and logical channel for this crosspoint. For example,
assign logical channel 1 of DPM 1 by selecting
DPM 1 LOG CHAN 1.
5. Rotate the KEY INPUT knob to assign the desired DPM
number and logical channel for this crosspoint. For example,
assign logical channel 1 of DPM 1 by selecting DPM 1 LOG
CHAN 1.
3-43
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Press the CONFG button to return to the Configuration menu.
Peripheral Interface Menu
From the External Interface menu press Peripheral I/f> to bring up
the Peripheral Interface menu.
The Peripheral Interface Bus allows communications with
external devices such as a GVG DPM 700 using Peripheral Bus II
protocol. This menu indicates the settings of the baud and parity
for the Peripheral PORT A3 on the Expanded Communications
Module on the back of the frame.
PERIPHERAL INTERFACE MENU
config/extern if/peripheral if
NOTE:
The Peripheral Bus port is labelled
"Port A3" on the rear of the frame
electronics.
2400
4800
9600
ODD
EVEN
NONE
19200
38400
BAUD
PARITY
PERIPHERAL
TRIGGERS>
3-44
External Interface Menu
1. Select the desired switcher peripheral port BAUD rate with
the BAUD button. (For a DPM-700 set the baud rate to 38400
and parity to NONE.) The choices are listed below:
■
■
■
■
■
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
2. Select the desired parity for the switcher peripheral port with
the PARITY button. The choices are listed below:
■
■
■
ODD
EVEN
NONE
From the PERIPHERAL I/F menu select the PERIPHERAL
TRIGGERS> button.
3-45
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Peripheral Triggers Menu
From the Peripheral Interface menu, press PERIPHERAL
TRIGGERS> to open the Peripheral Triggers menu.
PERIPHERAL TRIGGERS MENU
config/extern if/peripheral if/peripheral triggers
DEVICE NUMBER
= 1
DEVICE NO. FUNCTN NO.
LEVEL
-
A
B
C
D
1
1
1
4
DPM 1
FUNCTION NUMBER
= 4
1
0
1
0
-
15
E
F
-
0
-
-
<>LEVEL
= DPM 1
2
-
17
3
G
H
1
-
15
-
B
TRIGGER
SELECT
FIRE
B
Use this menu to configure eight peripheral triggers for the
switcher (designated A through H). Each trigger specifies what is
to be done and is sent to a particular address (Device Number) on
the Peripheral Bus. This menu also allows delegation of the trigger
to the E-MEM level of misc or DPM 1 - DPM 4.
Once configured, these triggers can be learned into E-MEM effects
(on the MISc or dpm 1 - dpm 4 level) or fired directly from this
menu (FIRE n. Refer to the Attach Peripheral Trigger Menu
description in this manual for attaching peripheral triggers to
E-MEM registers.
1. Increment TRIGGER SELECT to select the designator to be
assigned (A through H).
2. Turn the DEVICE NUMBER soft knob to select the peripheral
device to which that trigger will be sent.
3-46
External Interface Menu
3. Turn the FUNCTION NUMBER soft knob to select the device
function that will be triggered by a trigger message on the
Peripheral II bus.
The device functions for a DPM 700 depend on whether the DPM
is operating in trigger mode, or E-MEM recall mode, as listed in
Table 3-2.
Table 3-2. . DPM 700 Functions
Trigger DPM Trigger Function
DPM E-MEM Recall
0
Function not defined
STOP
Not valid
1
DPM RECALL REGISTER 1
DPM RECALL REGISTER 2
DPM RECALL REGISTER 3
DPM RECALL REGISTER 4
DPM RECALL REGISTER 5
DPM RECALL REGISTER 6
DPM RECALL REGISTER 7
DPM RECALL REGISTER 8
DPM RECALL REGISTER 9
DPM RECALL REGISTER 10
DPM RECALL REGISTER 11
DPM RECALL REGISTER 12
DPM RECALL REGISTER 13
DPM RECALL REGISTER 14
DPM RECALL REGISTER 15
2
RUN
3
NEXT KEYFRAME
PREVIOUS KEYFRAME
STOP NEXT
4
5
6
REVERSE
7
REWIND
8
KEYER AUTO-TRANS
KEYER CUT
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
FADE TO BLACK AUTO-TRANS
FADE TO BLACK CUT
COMBINER AUTO-TRANS
COMBINER CUT
Function not defined
Function not defined
3-47
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
4. Turn the Level soft knob to select which E-MEM level will
activate this trigger.
Press EXIT to return to the Peripheral Interface menu.
Press EXIT again to return to the External Interface menu.
GPI Outputs Menu
From the External Interface menu press GPI Outputs to bring up
the GPI Outputs menu.
The GPI Outputs menu allows you to set which E-MEM Level
each of the GPIs is assigned. The default condition is Misc. There
is also provision for setting the length of the GPI signal.
LENGTH
= 1 Field
GPI OUTPUTS MENU
config / external if / gpi outputs
LEVEL
LENGTH
1
1
1
2
3
4
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
1
1
5
6
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
1
1
1
OFF
GPI 1
GPI 2
GPI 3
GPI 4
GPI 5
GPI 6
GPI 7
GPI 8
7
8
1
MISC
DPM 1
DPM 2
DPM 3
DPM 4
7
PGM CUT
TRIGGER
SELECT
GPI
E-MEM
LEVEL
1. Select a GPI by pressing the Select GPI Button until the
desired GPI number shows up in the window.
2. Select the E-MEM level by pressing the E-MEM Level Button
until the desired desired E-MEM Level is highlighted.
3. Turn the Length knob to select the required GPI duration.
3-48
Aux Bus Format Menu
4. Repeat for other GPIs.
Press Exit to return the the External Interface Menu
Press Exit to return the the Configuration Menu
Aux Bus Format Menu
From the Configuration menu, press the AUX BUS FORMAT>
button to display the Aux Bus Format menu:
There are five pairs of Aux Buses in the Model 2200, designated
A1 through A5, and B1 through B5. Aux pairs one through four
are not configurable (video/ key only). Aux bus pair five can be
configured as video/ video or video/ key signals. In addition, Aux
buses 1-4 (A and B) may be configured for either shaped or
unshaped video output.
AUX BUS FORMAT MENU
config / aux bus format
VIDEO
KEY
AUX
BUS 5B
AUX BUS
SHAPING>
The selection above the AUX BUS button indicates the
format selected for the corresponding B bus.
3-49
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
1. For the “5B” bus, select either VIDEO or KEY with the
appropriate soft button.
2. Press the AUX BUS SHAPING> button to select the Aux Bus
Shaping menu.
Press EXIT to return to the Peripheral Interface menu.
Aux Bus Shaping Menu
From the Aux Bus Format menu, press the AUX BUS Shaping>
button to display the Aux Bus Shaping menu.
The Aux Bus Shaping Menu allows you to select the output
configuration to be always shaped or always unshaped on aux buses
one and two. Thus the configuration should be set according to
the input needs of the external device connected to the aux bus.
The switcher then internally decides whether to turn on shaping
or unshaping circuitry according to the nature of the video/ key
pair feeding the aux bus.
NOTE: The output shaped/unshaped selections for the Aux Buses apply
only to the Aux 1 and Aux 2 outputs and only if the Effects Send option
is present. Without the circuitry on the Effects Send module, the aux bus
outputs simply pass whatever signal is present—either shaped or
unshaped.
1. Press the PHYS AUX SELECT button to select the physical aux
bus to be used in the effects send loop.
2. Set the VIDEO/KEY FMT selections for Aux Buses 1 and 2 to
match the characteristic SHAPED or UNSHAPED expected by
the external devices connected to those outputs. These
settings control the states of the shapers and unshapers on the
Aux Bus outputs.
3-50
Aux Bus Format Menu
AUX BUS SHAPING MENU
config / aux bus format / aux bus shaping
PHYSICAL
AUX BUS 1
LOGICAL
AUX BUS 1
ON
AUX BUS 2 AUX BUS 2
AUX BUS 3 AUX BUS 3
AUX BUS 4 AUX BUS 4
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
AUX BUS 1
OFF
PHYS AUX
SELECT
UNSHAPER
1. Press the PHYS AUX SELECT button to select the physical aux
bus to be used.
2. With the UNSHAPER button, select the format of the video
output on the aux bus to match the input requirements of the
device that is to use the signal: ON if the video is already
shaped but the external device needs a full screen-sized
picture, or OFF if the device can accept video that has already
been processed by a key signal.
3-51
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
The LOGICAL column indicates the logical aux bus being
used. This may be different from the physical aux bus when
the Model 2200 is connected to a Kaleidoscope or other DPM
that is able to control the aux buses. (This column is
informational only. You can not change it from this menu.)
NOTE: Since the process of unshaping the video signal results in
dividing the video signal by its key, level errors, especially around black,
may produce extreme signal levels where the key is at or near zero.
Kaleidoscope ignores these extraneous signals, but they may cause
problems with external sync separators or clamps. Therefore, it is
recommended that connections to Kaleidoscope inputs be made directly
from the 2200 Aux Bus outputs.
When the Effects Send option is not present, the VIDEO/KEY FMT
selections are not visible in the menu.
This is the end of the Configuration menu and the end of the
switcher setup. The following menus are used by the operators to
operate the switcher.
3-52
M/E Mode Menu
M/E Mode Menu
Press the M/E Mode button at the left of the panel to display the
M/ E Mode menu. Use the M/ E Mode menu to select Standard or
Layered mode, and to turn Full Additive Mix mode on or off on
an M/ E-by-M/ E basis.
KEY 1 OPACITY
= 100.00%
M/E MODE MENU
me mode
KEY 2 OPACITY
M/E 1
M/E 2
STANDARD
LAYERED
OFF
= 100.00%
ON
KEY A OPACITY
= 100.00%
LAYERED
ON
M/E 1
M/E 2
KEY B OPACITY
= 100.00%
STANDARD
OFF
M/E
SELECT
M/E
MODE
FULL
ADD MIX
M/E
COPY >
The following menu selections are accessible through the M/ E
Mode menu:
M/E SELECT — Selects the M/ E system to be adjusted.
M/E MODE — Sets the selected M/ E to either Layered mode or
Standard mode. In Layered mode, the A and B buses function as
keyers rather than background buses. In Standard mode, the A
and B buses function as background buses.
FULL ADD MIX — Enables or disables the FAM mode when in
Layered mode. When FAM is on, the opacity of each layer is
adjustable with a soft knob.
M/E COPY> — Opens the M/ E Copy menu.
3-53
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
M/E Copy Menu
From the M/ E Mode menu, press the M/E copy> button to display
the M/ E Copy menu. This menu allows you to copy or swap all
M/ E settings between M/ Es.
M/E COPY MENU
me mode / me copy
COPY
M/E 1
M/E 1
TO
M/E 2
M/E 2
SWAP
WITH
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 1
M/E 2
FROM
M/E
TO
M/E
DO M/E
SWAP
DO M/E
COPY
The M/ E Copy menu selections are:
FROM M/E — Selects the M/ E system to copy or swap from.
TO M/E — Selects the M/ E system to copy or swap to.
DO M/E SWAP — Initiates the M/ E swap currently selected.
DO M/E COPY — Initiates the M/ E copy currently selected.
NOTE: An UNDO function appears in the menu after a Copy or Swap
operation has been initiated. The Undo must be performed before exiting
the menu in order to take effect.
Press exit to return to the M/ E Mode menu.
3-54
Status Menu
Status Menu
Press the Status button at the left of the panel to display the Status
menu. Use the Status menu to get information about the current
software version number.
STATUS MENU
status
SYSTEM
LOG>
INSTALL
INFO >
DIAGS >
The Status menu selections are:
System Log> — Opens the log of system errors.
INSTALL INFO > — Opens the Install Info Status menu, which
displays the version of the software installed.
DIAGS > — Opens the Diagnostics menu. This menu is not
installed at this time.
3-55
Status Menu
System Log Menu
The system log is intended mainly for use by GVG personnel for
fault identification. GVG may ask customers to search the log for
a specific message, or ask customers to read back the last few
messages. This information can help in isolating a fault or
discovering a software bug.
The contents of the system log do not necessarily indicate a
problem with the switcher. Routine information and warning
messages normally appear in the log. Normally, switcher
operation is not affected by events that generate log messages.
The log can contain messages from before a system reset or power
up. This may allow GVG personnel to debug a problem if an error
was logged prior to the system locking up.
Each time the system is reset, a special message is entered in the
log indicating the time of the reset. These messages tend to
separate sections of the log.
SYSTEM LOG MENU
- - - - - - MESSAGE LOG CLEARED BY USER AT 15:57:24 ON JAN 5 1995
SCROLL
PAGE
UP
PAGE
DOWN
FIRST
PAGE
LAST
PAGE
LAST
RESET
CLEAR
LOG
3-57
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
The System Log menu selections are:
The PAGE UP and PAGE D OWN buttons allow you to scroll up
and down the log on page at a time.
PAGE UP,PAGE DOWN, FIRST PAGE, LAST PAGE — Use these
page scrolling buttons as required to view the desired
messages.
If you press the FIRST PAGE button, the beginning of the log
displays.
If you press the LAST PAGE button, the most recently logged
messages will display. This is often the most useful button to
press for fault determination. (This button is not available
when you are already displaying the last page.)
The SCROLL soft knob allows you to scroll up or down the
screen one line at a time.
CLEAR LOG — Erase all current error messages.
The LAST RESET button (System Log Menu) brings the first
message after the last system power up or reset to the top of
the display.
There may be no SYSTEM RESET message in the log because:
Someone cleared the log (CLEAR LOG button). In this
case, a “MESSAGE LOG CLEARED BY USER AT...”
message will be the first entry in the log.
The message log overflowed. Only the most recent
messages are retained if an overflow occurs, so the
SYSTEM RESET message may not be present.
3-58
Keyer Menu
Keyer Menu
Press the keyer button to select the Keyer menu. This menu is used
to make key characteristic adjustments that are not available on
the control panel. The statuses of these characteristics are
displayed on each key bus of the selected M/ E. (Only Key 1 and
Key 2 are shown when in Standard mode.)
KEYER MENU
keyer
OPACITY
= 100.00%
KEY 1
OFF
HORIZ KEY POSITION
= 0.00 clocks
KEY 2
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
M/E 1
KEY A
KEY B
ON
OFF
M/E 1
M/E 2
KEY 1
AUTO
M/E
SELECT
KEYER
SELECT
KEYER
COPY >
VIDEO
CALIBRATE PROCESS >
KEY 1
NAM >
SHAPING
3-59
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
The following selections are accessible through the Keyer menu:
M/E SELECT — Selects the M/ E to be adjusted.
KEYER SELECT — Selects the keyer to be adjusted.
SHAPING — Forces shaped ON or unshaped OFF video for the
selected key bus, regardless of the current Configuration menu
setting, or allows the current Configuration setting to apply AUTO.
OPACITY — Adjusts the opacity of the selected key.
HORIZ KEY POSITION — Adjusts the horizontal position of the
selected key.
KEYER COPY> — Opens the Keyer Copy menu to allow keyer
parameters to be copied from one keyer to another.
CALIBRATE — Resets all functions that turn on the Source Select
UNCAL lamp to their default values (includes CORING and
OPACITY.
VIDEO PROCESS> — Opens the Video Process menu, which
allows adjustment of the luminance gain, chroma gain, and DC
offset for the individual key bus selected.
KEY 1 NAM> — Opens the Key 1 NAM menu, which allows non-
additive mixing (NAMing) of Key 2 into Key 1 on the selected
M/ E
3-60
Keyer Menu
Keyer Copy Menu
From the Keyer menu, press keyer copy> to select the Keyer Copy
menu. This menu is used to copy keyer parameters from any
keyer to another.
KEYER COPY MENU
keyer / keyer copy
COPY
M/E 1 KEY 2
M/E 1 KEY 2
TO
M/E 2 KEY 2
M/E 2 KEY 2
SWAP
WITH
KEY 1
KEY 1
KEY 2
KEY A
KEY B
KEY 2
KEY A
KEY B
EXCLUDE
INCLUDE
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 1
M/E 2
FROM
GROUP
FROM
KEYER
TO
GROUP
TO
KEYER
DO KEYER
SWAP
DO KEYER
COPY
WIPES
FROM GROUP and FROM KEYER — Select the Keyer whose setup
parameters are to be copied.
WIPES — Allows you to include or exclude Wipe settings that
may be associated with the selected keyers.
TO GROUP and TO KEYER — Select the destination Keyer that is to
receive the copied keyer setup.
DO KEYER SWAP — Initiates the keyer Swap currently selected.
DO KEYER COPY — Initiates the keyer Copy currently selected.
NOTE: An UNDO function appears in the menu after a Copy or Swap
operation has been initiated. The Undo must be performed before exiting
the menu in order to take effect.
NOTE: If the destination Keyer has different parameters than the source
Keyer, those parameters are set to default values in the destination Keyer.
Press exit to return to the Keyer menu.
3-61
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Video Process Menu
From the Keyer menu, press video process> to select the Video
Process menu. This menu is used to adjust luminance gain,
chroma gain, and D.C. offset for the selected bus.
LUM GAIN
VIDEO PROCESS MENU
keyer / video process
= 1.00
KEY 1
KEY 2
A
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
CHROMA GAIN
= 1.00
M/E 2
ON
OFF
ON
B
OFF
DC OFFSET
= 0.00 IRE
M/E 1
M/E 2
ON
ON
CORING
= 7.50 IRE
KEY 2
OFF
OFF
M/E
SELECT
BUS
SELECT
VIDEO
PROCESS
RESTORE
DEFAULTS
CORING
The Video Process menu selections are:
M/E SELECT — Selects the M/ E to be adjusted.
BUS SELECT — Selects the bus to be adjusted.
3-62
Keyer Menu
VIDEO PROCESS — Enables or disables the Video Processing
adjustments listed below for the selected bus.
LUM GAIN — Sets luminance gain of the selected bus.
CHROMA GAIN — Sets chroma gain of the selected bus.
DC OFFSET — Sets D.C. offset of the selected bus.
CORING — Enables or disables the coring function for linear keys
on the selected key bus (applies only to Key 1 and Key 2 buses in
Standard mode and A and B buses in Layered mode).
CORING — Adjusts M/ E background video in key area to
ensure that video is fully removed.
RESTORE DEFAULTS — Restores default adjustments of the
selected soft knob functions.
Press exit to return to the Keyer menu.
Key 1 NAM Menu
From the Keyer menu, press key 1 nam> to select the Key 1 Nam
menu. This menu is used for NAMing Key 2 into Key 1. NAM
stands for Non-Additive Mix. Refer to to the Glossary in this
manual for a NAM definition.
3-63
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
NAM SOFTNESS
= 0%
KEY 1 NAM MENU
keyer / key 1 nam
NAM OFFSET
= 50%
M/E 1
M/E 2
KEY 1
KEY 1
ON
OFF
M/E 1
M/E 2
ON
OFF
M/E
SELECT
NAM K2
INTO K1
RESTORE
DEFAULTS
Selections in the Key 1 NAM menu are as follows:
M/E SELECT — Selects the M/ E to be set.
NAM K2 INTO K1 — Enables or disables NAMing Key 2 into Key 1.
When NAMing Key 2 into Key 1, Key 2 will be on the M/ E output
but not indicated by a key ON indicator. (The crosspoint button
tally will be correct.)
Restore Defaults — Restores default conditions to selected M/ E.
NAM SOFTNESS — Adjusts the video signal transition area
between two video signals for the selected M/ E.
NAM OFFSET — Set the transition level in the case where two or
more video signals are present, the signal with the largest
instantaneous amplitude is passed.
Press exit to return to the Keyer menu.
3-64
Chroma Key Menu
Chroma Key Menu
Press the Chroma key button to select the Chroma Key menu. This
menu is used to select and adjust a variety of chroma key
parameters.
FOREGROUND CORING
CHROMA KEY MENU
/chrKey
= 7.50 IRE
ME 1 KEY 1
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
FIXED
SHADOW GAIN
= 50%
ME 1 KEY 2
ME 2 KEY 1
ME 2 KEY 2
VARIABLE
OFF
SHADOW CLIP
= 50%
VARIABLE
FIXED
ON
ON
ME 2 KEY 1
OFF
OFF
OFF
CHR KEY FOREGROUND BACKGROUND FOREGROUND SECONDARY
SELECT VIDEO VIDEO CORING COLOR >
HUE
MODS >
KEY
ADJUST >
SETUP>
The Chroma Key button selections are:
CHR KEY SELECT — Selects the M/ E Keyer to be adjusted.
FOREGROUND VIDEO — Turns the foreground on and off. When
off, the foreground image is replaced with black.
BACKGROUND VIDEO — Turns the background on and off. When
on, the foreground image is a full raster image.
3-65
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
FOREGROUND CORING — Turns foreground coring on and off.
Coring replaces the key area of the background with black to
ensure a clean key when background and fill are additively keyed
together.
VARIABLE provides a FOREGROUND CORING adjustment
knob.
FIXED provides a factory default foreground coring level.
OFF must be selected to enable the Chroma Key panel BKGD
SUPR LUM and CHROMA knobs.
SHADOW GAIN — May be used to adjust the clip level of the
Chroma Key shadow after the function has been turned on by
the SHDW ON button on the Chroma Keyers subpanel.
SHADOW CLIP — May be used to adjust the clip level of the
Chroma Key shadow after the function has been turned on by
the SHDW ON button on the Chroma Keyers subpanel.
SECONDARY COLOR > — Opens the Secondary Color menu.
Adjust the secondary color suppression angle, secondary color
selectivity, and secondary chroma suppression level.
HUE MODS > — Opens the Hue Modifications menu. Adjust the
secondary hue angle, separate hue suppression, flare suppression,
and flare suppression offset.
KEY ADJUST > — Opens the CK Key Adjust menu. Adjust the
chroma key position, width, and key softness.
SETUP > — Opens the CK Setup menu. Chroma Key Auto Setup
allows you to use the Positioner joystick to select the color to be
suppressed.
3-66
Chroma Key Menu
Chroma Key Secondary Color Menu
From the Chroma Key menu, press the secondary color> button
to select the Secondary Color menu. This menu is used to select
and adjust secondary color suppression angle, selectivity, chroma
and luminance suppression level and fringe control.
CK SECONDARY COLOR MENU
chr key/secondary color
SEC COLOR SUPPRESS ANGLE
370.0 degrees
=
(0.0 degrees CW from Primary)
SEC COLOR SUPPRESS SELECTIVITY
= 50%
OFF
ME1 KEY 1
ME1 KEY2
ME2 KEY1
ME2 KEY 2
ON
ON
ON
ON
SEC CHROMA/LUM SUPPRESS LEVEL
= 30%
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
CHROMA
LUMA
FRINGE CONTROL
= 30%
ME2 KEY1
OFF
CHR KEY
SELECT
SEC COLOR SUPPRESS
SEC AUTO
SUPPRESS
MODE
SETUP
3-67
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
The CK Secondary Color menu selections are:
CHR KEY SELECT — Delegates the chroma keyer to be adjusted.
SECONDARY COLOR SUPPRESS — Enables or disables secondary
color suppress and the following soft knobs:
SEC COLOR SUPPRESS ANGLE — Provides an offset
adjustment to the primary chroma key hue setting.
SEC COLOR SUPPRESS SELECTIVITY — Adjusts selectivity of
the chroma key hue control.
SEC CHROMA/LUMA SUPPRESS LEVEL — CHROMA:
Changes a second color in the foreground that may have been
affected by the primary color suppression. For example, if the
video set is a person with blond hair standing in front of a
blue background, individual strands of the blond hair may
appear bluish after suppressing the blue background. By
adjusting the secondary chroma suppression level, you can
adjust the hair color back to its normal blond. LUMA: Control
the luma contribution of the background to the foreground
part of the scene.
FRINGE CONTROL — Use to restore color to the gray portions
of the foreground color resulting from adjustments to the SEC
CHROMA SUPPRESS LEVEL.
SUPPRESS MODE — Suppresses either chroma or luma modes for
the selected chroma key.
Press exit to return to the Chroma Key menu.
3-68
Chroma Key Menu
Chroma Key Hue Modifiers Menu
From the Chroma Key menu, press the hue mods> button to select
the Hue Modifiers menu. This menu is used to select and adjust
hue selectivity and flare suppression.
CK HUE MODIFIERS MENU
/chr_key/hue_mods
SEPARATE HUE SUPPRESS ANGLE
127 degrees
=
(150.5 degrees CCW from Primary)
FOREGROUND FLARE SUPPRESS
ME1 KEY 1
ME1 KEY2
ME2 KEY1
ME2 KEY 2
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
HIGH
OFF
=
75%
ON
HIGH
MEDIUM
LOW
ON
ON
ME2 KEY1
CHR KEY
OFF
OFF
OFF
FLARE
SUPPRESS SUPPRESS
FGD NOISE
SEP HUE
SUPPRESS
SELECT
The CK Hue Modifiers menu selections are:
CHR KEY SELECT — Delegates the chroma keyer to be adjusted.
SEP HUE SUPPRESS — Enables or disables suppression of the
selected hue from background and foreground. Also enables or
disables the SEPARATE HUE SUPPRESS soft knob.
SEPARATE HUE SUPPRESS — Adjusts hue suppression
applied to background and foreground.
FLARE SUPPRESS — Enables or disables suppression of the
selected hue from the foreground. Also enables or disables the
FOREGROUND FLARE SUPPRESS soft knob.
FOREGROUND FLARE SUPPRESS — Used to adjust the
amount of foreground glare caused by a camera lens.
3-69
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
FGD NOISE SUPPRESS — Corrects for color impurities in video
tape. For example, if you are keying out blue in your source tape
and the white on the tape is blue-shifted, you will also key out the
white. The offset suppression adjustment allows you to change
the origin of the suppression space, so that the blue-shifted white
is not included in the suppression.
Press exit to return to the Chroma Key menu.
Chroma Key Adjust Menu
From the Chroma Key menu, press the key adjust> button to select
the Key Adjust menu. This menu is used to adjust the chroma key
horizontal position, key width, and softness.
KEY WIDTH
= 1.0 CLOCKS
(69.8 nsecs)
CK ADJUST MENU
/chr_key/key_adjust
KEY SOFTNESS
ME1 KEY1
ME1 KEY2
ME2 KEY1
ME2 KEY2
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
= 50%
ON
ON
ON
HORIZ KEY POSITION
= -2.0 CLOCKS
(-139.6 nsec)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ME2 KEY1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CHR KEY
SELECT
KEY
WIDTH
KEY
SOFTNESS
KEY
POSITION
FGD
RESHAPE
KEY
S-SHAPING
3-70
Chroma Key Menu
Chroma Key Adjust menu selections are:
CHR KEY SELECT — Delegates the chroma keyer to be adjusted.
KEY WIDTH — Enables or disables the KEY WIDTH soft knob.
KEY WIDTH — Adjusts width of the chroma key.
KEY SOFTNESS — Enables or disables the KEY SOFTNESS soft
knob.
KEY SOFTNESS — Use to adjust the foreground edges to the
key cut into the background. When off, horizontal and
vertical softness are forced to zero.
KEY POSITION — Enables or disables the Horiz. Key Position soft
knob.
HORIZ KEY POSITION — Adjusts the horizontal position of the
chroma key.
FGD RESHAPING — When ON, causes the shaped fill out of the
chroma keyer to be multiplied by the key signal out of the chroma
keyer. Depending upon the picture(s), FGD RESHAPING may
improve the appearance of the chroma key.
KEY S-SHAPING — Enables an S-shape chroma compression
function. Chroma compression helps remove slight
transparencies in the foreground, and low-level noise in the
background.
Press exit to return to the Chroma Key menu.
3-71
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Chroma Key Setup Menu
From the Chroma Key menu, press the setup button to select the
Key Setup menu. This menu is used to select a chroma key
suppress color from a chroma key signal. Use the Positioner
joystick to position the cursor on the color to be suppressed.
CK SETUP MENU
/chr_Key setup
M/E 1 KEY 1
M/E 1 KEY 2
M/E 2 KEY 1
MOVE POSITIONER TO THE MOST SATURATED BACKGROUND AREA,
AND PRESS 'AUTO SETUP' AGAIN TO SUPPRESS THAT HUE.
M/E 2 KEY 2
M/E 2 KEY 1
KEYER
SELECT
AUTO
SETUP
CANCEL
The Chroma Key Setup menu selections are:
KEYER SELECT — Delegates the chroma keyer to setup.
AUTO SETUP — Use to begin or complete an Auto Setup session.
Auto Setup mode is entered after you press the Auto Setup
button. In this mode, use the Positioner to move the cursor
displayed on the Preview monitor. Place the cursor on the color to
be suppressed, then press the AUTO SETUP button again to
complete; or press CANCEL to abort. Auto Setup mode will also be
aborted if you exit the menu, or if the delegated keyer in not of the
type CHROMA KEY.
CANCEL — Use to abort an Auto Setup in progress.
Press exit to return to the Chroma Key menu.
3-72
Wipe Menu
Wipe Menu
Press the wipe button to select the Wipe menu.
WIPE MENU
wipe
WIPE
MODS >
WIPE
COPY >
PATTERN > TEXTURE >
The following menu selections are accessible through the Wipe
menu:
PATTERN> — Opens the Wipe Pattern menu.
TEXTURE> — Opens the Wipe Texture menu.
WIPE MODS> — Opens the Wipe Modifiers menu.
WIPE COPY> — Opens the Wipe Copy menu.
3-73
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Wipe Pattern Menu
From the Wipe menu, press the pattern> button to select the Wipe
Pattern menu. This menu is used to assign a variety of wipe
patterns to a selected wipe generator.
PATTERN
SELECT
WIPE PATTERN MENU
6
1
0
2
3
8
5
7
23
4
9
11
21
14
10
13
23
33
43
53
18
12
15
25
16
17
19
24
22
28
20
30
26
27
37
29
LRG
SML
RNDM RNDM
38 39
34
35
36
32
42
31
TEX-
TURE
45
44
41
40
46
47 48
49
EXT
52
55
56
54
50
51
58
57
M/E 1
PRI
M/E 1
SEC
M/E 2
PRI
M/E 2
SEC
M/E 1 PRI — Assigns the PATTERN SELECT soft knob to the M/ E 1
Primary Wipe Generator.
M/E 1 SEC — Assigns the PATTERN SELECT soft knob to the M/ E
1 Secondary Wipe Generator.
M/E 2 PRI — Assigns the PATTERN SELECT soft knob to the M/ E 2
Primary Wipe Generator.
M/E 2 SEC — Assigns the PATTERN SELECT soft knob to the M/ E
2 Secondary Wipe Generator.
PATTERN SELECT soft knob selects the pattern for the selected
M/ E.
NOTE: The Menu button in the wipe select area must be pressed for the
selected pattern to be available to the M/E.
3-74
Wipe Menu
Press exit to return to the Wipe menu.
Wipe Texture Menu
From the Wipe menu. press the texture> button to select the Wipe
Texture menu. This menu is used to adjust the appearance of the
video texture.
WIPE TEXTURE MENU
wipe / texture
M/E 1 PRI
M/E 1 SEC
M/E 2 PRI
M/E 2 SEC
1:1
1:1
6:1
2:1
2:1
FREE RUN
2:1
NONE
NOTCH
3
6
5
2
1
1
2
4
6
6
1
3
NOTCH
SMOOTHING
1:1
1:1
2:1
3:1
4:1
6:1
8:1
1:1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
2:1
4:1
1
6:1
SMOOTHING
NOTCH
2
3
4
8:1
FREE RUN
NONE
M/E 2 PRI
WIPE GEN
SELECT
HORIZ
STRETCH
VERT
MODE
FILTER
MODE
LENGTH
A
LENGTH
B
SOURCE
The Wipe Texture menu selections are as follows for the selected
wipe generator:
HORIZ STRETCH — Selects one of the horizontal stretch ratios
listed in the menu.
VERT MODE — Selects one of the vertical stretch ratios listed in the
menu.
FILTER MODE — Selects one of the filtering modes listed in the
menu.
LENGTH A — Selects one of the lengths listed in the menu.
3-75
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
LENGTH B — Selects one of the lengths listed in the menu.
SOURCE — Selects one of the sources listed.
Press exit to return to the Wipe menu.
Wipe Modifiers Menu
From the Wipe menu, press the wipe mods> button to select the
Wipe Modifiers menu. This menu is used to assign several
different wipe modifiers to each wipe generator.
SPLIT OFFSET
WIPE MODIFIERS MENU
wipe / wipe mods
= 0%
ME 1 PRI
ME 1 SEC
ME 2 PRI
ME 2 SEC
MIX
TEXTURE
NORMAL
NORMAL
TEXTURE
ON
OFF
ON
REVERSE
NORMAL
NORMAL
REVERSE
MIX
NAM -
NAM+
ON
NAM -
NAM+
MIX
TEXTURE
NORMAL
ON
REVERSE
NORMAL
ME 2 PRI
OFF
WIPE GEN
SELECT
PTN MIX
TYPE
PTN MIX
SOURCE
SPLIT
OFFSET
PST PTN
DIRECTION
WIPE
MODULATE >
The Wipe Modifiers menu selections are as follows for the
selected wipe generator:
WIPE GEN SELECT — Selects the desired wipe generator.
PTN MIX TYPE — Selects the type of pattern mix.
3-76
Wipe Menu
PTN MIX SOURCE — Selects the pattern mix source.
NORMAL — Selects a mix between the primary and secondary
wipe generators. This selection is prohibited if the secondary
wipe option is not installed.
TEXTURE — Selects a mix between the texture pattern and the
primary wipe generator.
SPLIT OFFSET button — Enables or disables the split wipe offset
function.
SPLIT OFFSET soft knob — Adjusts the offset of split wipes.
PST PTN DIRECTION — Selects the direction of the preset pattern
for the selected wipe generator.
WIPE MODULATE> — Opens the Wipe Modulation menu.
Press exit to return to the Wipe menu.
Wipe Modulation Menu
From the Wipe Modifiers menu, press the wipe modulate>} button
to select the Wipe Modulation menu. This menu is used to assign
modulation characteristics to the wipe generators
.
3-77
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
MODULATION AMPLITUDE
= 50%
WIPE MODULATION MENU
wipe / wipe mods / wipe modulate
M/E 1 PRI
M/E 1 SEC
M/E 2 PRI
M/E 2 SEC
HORIZ
VERT
HORIZ
LOCK
SINE
SINE
MODULATION FREQUENCY
= 0.50 cycles/screen
SINE
TRIANGLE
LOCK
HORIZ
VERT
OFF
TRIANGLE
SINE
M/E 2 PRI
WIPE GEN
SELECT
MODULATE
MODULATE WAVEFORM
3-78
Wipe Menu
The Wipe Modulation menu selections are as follows for the
selected wipe generator:
WIPE GEN SELECT — Selects the desired wipe generator.
MODULATE — Turns wipe modulation ON or OFF. When OFF, no
other buttons or knobs on this menu are available.
MODULATE WAVEFORM — Selects the modulation waveform,
either TRIANGLE or SINE.
MODULATION AMPLITUDE — Adjusts the amplitude of the
modulation signal.
MODULATION FREQUENCY — Adjusts the frequency of the
modulation signal.
Press exit to return to the Wipe Modifiers menu.
Press exit again to return to the Wipe menu.
3-79
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Wipe Copy Menu
From the Wipe menu, press the wipe copy> button to select the
Wipe Copy menu. This menu is used to copy or swap Primary
(PRI) or Secondary (SEC) wipe generator settings between M/ Es
WIPE COPY MENU
wipe / wipe copy
COPY
SWAP
M/E 1 PRI
M/E 1 PRI
TO
M/E 2 PRI
M/E 2 PRI
WITH
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 1
M/E 2
PRI
SEC
PRI
SEC
FROM
GROUP
FROM
WIPE GEN
TO
GROUP
TO
WIPE GEN
DO WIPE
SWAP
DO WIPE
COPY
The Wipe Copy menu selections are as follows:
FROM GROUP — Selects the M/ E to copy or swap from.
FROM WIPE GEN — Selects either the PRI or SEC Wipe Generator
to copy or swap from.
TO GROUP — Selects the M/ E to copy or swap to.
TO WIPE GEN — Selects either the PRI or SEC Wipe Generator to
copy or swap to.
DO WIPE SWAP — Initiates the wipe swap currently selected.
DO WIPE COPY — Initiates the wipe copy currently selected.
NOTE: An UNDO function appears in the menu after a Copy or Swap
operation has been initiated. The Undo must be performed before exiting
the menu in order to take effect.
Press exit to return to the Wipe menu.
3-80
E-MEM Menu
E-MEM Menu
Press the e-mem button to select the E-MEM menu. This menu is
used to display the status of several parameters on all levels of the
E-MEM register selected on the E-MEM panel, and sets up the
switcher to inhibit crosspoint changes when E-MEM recalls are
done.
E-MEM MENU
E-MEM
E-MEM
LEVEL
REG
ENABLE
STATUS
LOCK
STATUS
SEQ
LINK
SEQ
DELAY
KEYFRAMES
USED
AVAILABLE
M/E 1
M/E 2
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
ON
ON
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
000
000
698
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
698
BKGD
698
MISC
403
CHAN 1
CHAN 2
GLOBAL
CAMERA
403
403
403
397
ENABLE
DISABLE
ENABLE
DISABLE
SOURCE
HOLD>
PERIPH
DEVICES>
RUN
LEVER
KEYFRAME
EDITING
KF
PATH >
GPI & PBUS
TRIGGERS>
REGISTER>
3-81
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
The following selections are available under the E-MEM Menu:
REGISTER> — Displays the E-MEM Register Menu.
SOURCE HOLD> — Displays the Source Hold Menu.
PERIPH DEVICES> — Displays the Peripheral Devices Menu.
RUN LEVER — Enables or disables the Run lever arm to manually
move the Time Cursor along the timeline and manually run
keyframe effects. DISABLE may be used in a live situation to avoid
problems that might arise from bumping the lever arm.
KEYFRAME EDITING — Enables/ disables keyframe editing mode.
This activates the effects editing buttons on the E-MEM panel,
allowing multiple-keyframe effects to be built and modified.
ENABLE — Enables keyframe editing mode, which activates
the effects editing buttons on the E-MEM panel (low tally) and
allows multiple-keyframe effects to be built and modified.
DISABLE — Disables keyframe editing and turns off the
effects editing buttons.
KF PATHS> — Displays the Keyframe Paths Menu, which allows
the type of path to be set for interpolation of parameters between
keyframes.
GPI & PBUS TRIGGERS — Displays the GPI and PBUS Trigger
Menu.
3-82
E-MEM Menu
E-MEM Register Menu
From the E-MEM menu, press the register> button to select the E-
MEM Register menu. This menu is used to lock and unlock
registers, and to clear effects sequences.
E-MEM REGISTER MENU
E-MEM/register
Current Bank: 5
Current Register: 52
CLEAR REG
LOCK REG
CLEAR SEQ
LOCK
ALL
LOCK
BANK
LOCK
REG
SELECT
SELECT — Enables either locking/ unlocking E-MEM registers or
clearing sequences from registers.
3-83
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
For CLEAR REG:
CLEAR ALL — Clears all information for all 100 registers for all
enabled levels. After CLEAR ALL is pressed, a submenu comes
up to allow you to CONFIRM or CANCEL the operation.
CLEAR BANK — Clears all information for all registers in the
bank whose number is displayed in the menu for all enabled
levels. After CLEAR BANK is pressed, a submenu displays
with a CONFIRM or CANCEL choice.
CLEAR REG — Clears all information for the register whose
number is displayed in the menu for all enabled levels. After
CLEAR REG is pressed, a submenu displays with a CONFIRM
or CANCEL choice.
3-84
E-MEM Menu
For LOCK REG:
LOCK ALL, UNLOCK ALL — Locks or unlocks all 100 registers
for all currently enabled “levels.” (Levels are enabled with the
Enable buttons on the E-MEM panel - for a definition of levels,
refer to Enable Buttons, Effects Memory Subpanel, this
section.) If any registers are unlocked, a LOCK ALL selection is
displayed; if any or all registers are locked, an UNLOCK ALL
selection is displayed.
LOCK BANK, UNLOCK BANK — Locks or unlocks all registers
in the currently displayed bank and register for all currently
enabled levels. Note that the current bank displayed may not
be the same as the current bank for independent E-MEM
levels. If that is the case, the current bank will not get locked
on those levels, but the selected bank will.
If any currently enabled E-MEM level has an unlocked
register in the bank, a LOCK BANK instruction is displayed for
the currently displayed bank number. When all registers in
the bank are locked, an UNLOCK BANK instruction is
displayed.
LOCK REG, UNLOCK REG — Locks the register whose number
is displayed in the menu for all currently enabled levels. Note
that this may not be the current register for some levels. If that
is the case, the current register will not get locked on those
levels, but the selected register will.
If any currently enabled E-MEM register level is unlocked, a
LOCK REG instruction is displayed for the currently displayed
register number. When all of the enabled E-MEM register
levels are locked, an UNLOCK REG instruction is displayed.
3-85
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
For CLEAR SEQ:
CLEAR ALL — Clears only sequence information for all 100
registers for all enabled levels. After CLEAR ALL is pressed, a
submenu comes up to allow you to CONFIRM or CANCEL the
operation.
CLEAR BANK — Clears only sequence information for all
registers in the bank whose number is displayed in the menu
for all enabled levels. After CLEAR BANK is pressed, a
submenu displays with a CONFIRM or CANCEL choice.
CLEAR REG — Clears only sequence information for the
register whose number is displayed in the menu for all
enabled levels. After CLEAR REG is pressed, a submenu
displays with a CONFIRM or CANCEL choice.
Press exit to return to the E-MEM menu.
3-86
E-MEM Menu
Source Hold Menu
From the E-MEM menu, press the source hold> button to select
the Source Hold menu. This menu is used to inhibit crosspoint
changes on individual buses during E-MEM recalls.
BUS
= ME 1 A
SOURCE HOLD MENU
E-MEM/source hold
BUS
ME 1 A
ME 2 A
PGM
BUS
HOLD
BUS
BUS
HOLD
HOLD
HOLD
HOLD
ME 1 B
ME 2 B
PST
-
-
-
-
-
-
ME 1 K1
ME 2 K1
DSK 1
AUX 1
AUX 5
AUX 9
-
-
-
-
ME 1 K2
ME 2 K2
DSK 2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PVW
MASK
AUX 4
AUX 8
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 7
-
-
AUX 6
-
-
ON
Menu changes delegated E-MEMs only.
OFF
CLEAR ALL
HOLDS
ALL
HOLD
SOURCE
HOLD
BUS = ... soft knob — Selects the bus to which the source hold is
to be applied.
CLEAR ALL OFF — Clears all Source Holds.
ALL Hold — Sets all Source Holds.
SOURCE HOLD — Enables or disables the Source Hold feature on
the selected bus. When ON, all crosspoints (video and key) on the
bus are held; that is, the state of the crosspoints does not change
when E-MEM recalls are done.
Press exit to return to the E-MEM menu.
3-87
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Peripheral Devices Menu
From the E-MEM menu, press the periph devices> button to select
the Peripheral menu. This menu is used to select the peripheral
devices you want included in E-MEM learns and recalls.
PERIPHERAL DEVICES MENU
E-MEM/periph devices
Set the peripheral
devices which are
to be affected by
E-MEM Learn and
Recall operations.
DEVICE NO.
DEVICE NO.
STATE
OFF
ON
DEVICE NO.
8
STATE
OFF
STATE
OFF
0
1
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
9
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2
3
4
5
6
7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
10
11
12
13
14
15
DEVICE NUMBER
= 1
ON
<>
OFF
CLEAR ALL
OFF
SET ALL
ON
DEVICE
1
CLEAR ALL OFF — Turns OFF learn and recall operations to all
devices on the peripheral bus.
SET ALL ON — Turns ON learn and recall operations to all devices
connected to the peripheral bus.
DEVICE Number= ... soft knob — Selects the Device Number to be
turned ON or OFF with regard to E-MEM learn and recall
operations.
DEVICE ... — Turns ON or OFF learn and recall operations to the
selected device.
Press exit to return to the E-MEM menu.
3-88
E-MEM Menu
Keyframe Path Menu
From the Keyframe Menu, press the kf paths> button to display
the Keyframe Path Menu. This menu is used to set the type of path
for interpolation of parameters between keyframes.
KEYFRAME PATH MENU
E-MEM / kf path
Register: 52 Keyframe: 2
TRANSITION S-LINEAR
KEY 1
KEY 2
KEY A
KEY B
WIPES
LINEAR
S-LINEAR
HOLD
HOLD
S-LINEAR
M/E 1
M/E 2
WIPEXFORM S-LINEAR
ALL
MISC
BKGD
CHAN 1
CHAN 2
GLOBAL
HOLD
ON
LINEAR
OFF
S-LINEAR
TRANSITION
CAMERA
SELECT
LEVEL
PAUSE
SELECT
GROUP
PATH
TYPE
LEVEL SELECT and GROUP SELECT — Select the register level
and the functional group to which the path type is to be applied.
Each functional group of each keyframe can have its own path
type. When ALL is selected, the same path type can be applied to
all functional groups simultaneously.
PATH TYPE — Selects the algorithm to be used for interpolating
between keyframes for the selected group. The available path
types are Linear, S-Linear, and Hold.
LINEAR — Causes a constant change in parameter values
between keyframes, with no acceleration or deceleration.
S-LINEAR — Causes the change to each parameter to begin
slowly as it leaves the starting keyframe, to move faster
through the midrange of the keyframe duration, then to
decelerate as it approaches the destination keyframe.
3-89
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
CURVE — Provides three knobs to control the three
parameters of the path vector: TENSION, CONTINUITY, and
BIAS. These knobs act on the vector parameters to adjust the
path into (entry) and out of (exit) the keyframe. The path
through KF2 is parallel with an imaginary line drawn
between KF1 and KF2.
TENSION — Controls the length of the tension vector. At
a setting of 0, the imaginary line extends an equal distance
into and out of the keyframe, and the path through the
middle keyframe is curved. At 1.00, the Tension vector is
shortened to non-existence through KF2. At -1.00, the
effect is a lengthening of the Tension vector, causing the
path through the middle keyframe to be longer and
broader.
CONTINUITY — Determines the angle of the path into and
out of the keyframe. At 1.00, the effect is that of motion
dropping into and then out of the keyframe, similar to a
bouncing ball. At -1.00, the paths between the keyframes
become straight lines, accelerating through the keyframe.
BIAS — Determines whether the path will be “pulled”
towards the previous or the following keyframe. At 0, the
curve through the keyframe is gentle. At 1.00, the path is
pulled towards the previous keyframe. Entrance and exit
to the keyframe are on a straight line from the previous
keyframe, and the path of the effect travels completely
through KF2 before turning towards KF3. At -1.00, the
path is pulled towards the following keyframe. Entrance
and exit to the keyframe are a straight line pointed to the
following keyframe.
HOLD — Causes all parameters to hold at their starting values
throughout the keyframe duration. All changes occur at the
end of the keyframe duration, with no interpolation between
keyframes.
Press exit to return to the Keyframe menu.
3-90
E-MEM Menu
GPI and PBUS TRIGGERS Menu
From the E-MEM Menu, press the KF TRIGGERS> button to
display the GPI and PBUS Triggers Menu. This menu is used to
attach GPI triggers or peripheral triggers to E-MEM registers so
that the triggers will fire when the registers are recalled. The
triggers may be tested after setting them up.
GPI & PBUS TRIGGERS MENU
E-MEM / gpi & pbus triggers
Effect:
Keyframe:
PERIPHERAL TRIGGERS (PBUS 2)
GPI OUTPUT TRIGGERS
E-MEM LEVEL
E-MEM LEVEL
DEVICE
FUNCTION
-
-
-
-
A
B
C
D
E
F
1
-
6
-
1
6
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
G
H
MISC
OFF
MISC
OFF
A
1
SELECT
PERIPH
ATTACH
PERIPH
FIRE
A
FIRE
ATTACHED
SELECT
GPI
ATTACH
GPI
FIRE
1
FIRE
ATTACHED
SELECT GPI — Selects the GPI Output (1 through 8) to which you
may attach an E-MEM recall trigger. The trigger numbers
correspond to the physical connections made to the GPI Output
connectors on the rear of the switcher frame.
ATTACH — Attaches the selected trigger to the indicated E-MEM
register ON, or turns the trigger OFF.
FIRE GPI — Test fire the selected (highlighted) GPI.
FIRE ATTACHED — Test fire all attached GPIs (set to ON)
simultaneously, regardless of what is currently selected.
Press exit to return to the E-MEM Menu.
3-91
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
TRIGGER SELECT — Selects the Peripheral trigger (A through H)
which you may attach to an E-MEM recall. The triggers are
defined in the Peripheral Triggers submenu under Configuration.
ATTACH — Attaches the selected trigger to the indicated E-MEM
register (ON), or turns the trigger OFF.
FIRE X — Causes the selected (highlighted) trigger to fire (for
testing purposes).
FIRE ATTACHED — Causes all attached triggers (set to ON) to fire
simultaneously, regardless of the current selection (for testing
purposes).
NOTE: The Effect: is the currently selected E-MEM register.
(Keyframe: is the currently selected keyframe.)
Press exit to return to the Keyframe menu.
3-92
Keyframe Menu
Keyframe Menu
The Keyframe “top level” menu button invokes the Timeline
menu. The Timeline Menu provides a graphical display of the
keyframe positions for all enabled levels in the current E-MEM
register. This menu allows you to view changes to the effect in the
selected register while you add, remove, and edit keyframes.
The Timeline Menu can be accessed either by pressing the
KEYFRAME button on the main menu panel, or by pressing the
TIME CURSR button on the E-MEM effects editing panel.
TIME
RUN
RUN DEL
START
KF
TIMELINE MENU
> ———— Run Cursor
1:00 KF
2
Register 8
2 Keyframes Duration 1:00
KF editing enabled
1
2
Master Timeline
EFF DUR
M/E 1
M/E 2
SELECT
BKGD
MISC
CHAN 1
CHAN 2
GLOBAL
CAMERA
DPM 2
ZOOM
1.0X
DELEGATES
ENABLES
PAUSE
LAST
PAN / ZOOM
MOD ALL
ABSOLUTE
TIME ALIGN
LEVELS
SET
START TIME
NO PAUSE
The appearance of the Timeline Menu is determined by the state
of the current E-MEM register. Parameters that affect the
appearance of the menu include the following:
■
The number of the current E-MEM register selected on the
E-MEM keypad
■
■
Which levels are enabled and which are delegated
The number, location, and duration of keyframes stored in the
register
■
The position of the Time Cursor on the timeline
3-93
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
The menu illustrated is for a Model 2200-2 Intedgrated switcher
with all levels enabled, two keyframes in the effect, and keyframe
editing enabled.
MOD ALL ABSOLUTE — Performs a Mod operation (see Effects
Editing section) which causes the values in all keyframes to be
replaced with the current values in the Current Working Buffer.
This modifies all keyframes on a given level to a single value (for
example, changing the background to Blue in all keyframes on
that level).
Delegates and Enables
ENABLES — Provides a timeline for each level that is enabled
by the E-MEM ENABLE buttons. The ENABLE button of each
enabled level is high-tallied and the name of each enabled
level is highlighted in the menu.
DELEGATES — Allows individual enabled levels to be
delegated for modification while keeping the timelines of the
other enabled levels in the display.
When DELEGATES is selected, the names of the enabled levels
become unhighlighted in the menu and the buttons of the
enabled levels go to low tally on the E-MEM Enable panel.
Then, pressing one or more of the Enable buttons will
delegate the selected levels for timeline editing. The buttons
of the delegated levels will go to high tally and the names of the
delegated levels will be highlighted in the menu. (The buttons
of the undelegated enabled levels will remain at low tally.)
PAUSE — Allows you to insert a pause at a keyframe. When a
pause is added to a keyframe and a run is performed, the run will
stop at that keyframe on any level that has the pause
programmed. The presence of a pause at any keyframe and on
any timeline is indicated by a sloped line following the keyframe
marker. Each pause marker will also appear on the Master
Timeline.
The rules for adding a pause or inserting a keyframe that contains
a pause are the same as for changing any other parameter. You
3-94
Keyframe Menu
can add a pause to an existing keyframe by parking on that
keyframe, enabling PAUSE, and doing a Mod. Or you can insert a
keyframe with a pause by enabling PAUSE, then doing an Insert
After or Insert Before.
Software version 5.2 adds the ability to insert a pause at a
keyframe. When a pause is added to a keyframe and a run is
performed, the run stops at that keyframe on any level that has the
pause programmed. The presence of a pause at any keyframe and
on any timeline is indicated by a sloped line following the
keyframe marker. Each pause marker also appears on the Master
Timeline.
The rules for adding a pause or inserting a keyframe that contains
a pause are the same as for changing any other parameter. You
can add a pause to an existing keyframe by parking on that
keyframe, enabling PAUSE, and doing a Mod. Or you can insert a
keyframe with a pause by enabling PAUSE, then doing an Insert
After or Insert Before.
The basic rules for Auto Run on/ off remain the same, but the
results of running effects appear differently when pauses are
programmed.
> ———— Run Cursor
Register 8
0:00
5
KF
1
TIME
RUN
RUN DEL
START
KF
TIMELINE MENU
8 Keyframes
Duration 7:00
6
KF editing enabled
Master Timeline
1
2
3
4
7
8
EFF DUR
M/E 1
M/E 2
BKGD
4:00
5:00
SELECT
ZOOM
1.0X
DELEGATES
ENABLES
PAUSE
NO PAUSE
LAST
PAN / ZOOM
MOD ALL
ABSOLUTE
TIME ALIGN
LEVELS
SET
START TIME
3-95
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Example 1 – Inserting a Pause
1. Press the Keyframe button on the top menu panel or the Time
Cursr button on the Effects Editing panel to bring up the
Timeline Menu.
2. Recall an empty register or one that you can write over.
3. If in Enable Mode, enable M/E 1, M/E 2, and Bkgd. If in
Delegate mode, delegate M/E 1, M/E 2, and Bkgd.
4. Set up a Timeline Menu similar to that shown above; that is,
with staggered keyframes on the various levels, staggered
independent timeline lengths, and a total of about 8
keyframes. We will discuss adding the pauses in a moment.
(If you don’t know how to set up these timelines and
keyframes, refer to the Effects Editing portion of your User
Guide or Operator’s manual.)
5. Select DELEGATES in the Timeline Menu if not in this mode
already.
6. Undelegate M/E 2 and Bkgd (in the above example). (Turn off
M/E and Bkgd on the E-MEM panel.)
7. Rewind the effect, then press Next KF to move to Keyframe 2.
8. In the Timeline menu, undelegate the levels you do not wish
to modify, and delegate those levels you do wish to modify.
a. Press PAUSE/NO PAUSE button until the desired state
appears highlighted.
b. Press MOD.
NOTE: If the pause state of all delegated levels are not identical, neither
PAUSE or NO PAUSE is selectable.
3-96
Keyframe Menu
Example 2 – Inserting a Pause
1. Press E-MEM on the top menu panel to bring up the E-MEM
menu, then the soft KF PATHS button in the E-MEM menu to
access the Keyframe Path menu. Note (in the upper right
corner of the menu) that we are still on Keyframe 2 in the
selected register.
2. Select M/E 1 with the SELECT LEVEL button in the E-MEM
Keyframe Path Menu, then turn ON the PAUSE function.
Register: 8 Keyframe: 2
KEYFRAME PATH MENU
E-MEM / kf path
TRANSITION S-LINEAR
KEY 1
KEY 2
LINEAR
S-LINEAR
HOLD
TENSION
= 0.00
M/E 1
M/E 2
KEY A
For 2200-2i, delete M/E3,
PGM/PST, DSK; change DPMs
KEY B
HOLD
M/E 3
WIPES
S-LINEAR
CURVE
PGM PST
DSK
WIPEXFORM
ALL
CONTINUITY
= 0.00
MISC
FSTOREXFRM
BKGD
DPM 1
DPM 2
DPM 3
DPM 4
HOLD
LINEAR
S-LINEAR
CURVE
ON
BIAS
= 0.00
WIPEXFORM
OFF
SELECT
LEVEL
SELECT
GROUP
PATH
TYPE
PAUSE
3. Press Last Menu on the top menu panel to return to the
Keyframe Menu.
4. Press Mod. This modifies the selected keyframe (2) on the
delegated level (M/ E 1) to now include the programmed
pause.
5. Move to keyframe 4 with the Next KF button and, in the same
manner, add a pause to the BKGD level. (Undelegate M/E 1
and delegate Bkgd.)
6. Note that an easy way to move back and forth between the
Keyframe Menu and the E-MEM Menu is with the Last Menu
button.
7. Press Rewind.
3-97
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Effect Run with Auto Run Off (Master Timeline Enabled)
8. Turn off Auto Run if it is on.
9. Press Run.
Note that when a run is performed while Auto Run is off (Auto
Run pushbutton not lit), the run is performed on the Master
Timeline; therefore, the run stops at any keyframe that has a
pause programmed on any level. Thus, in the example, the
run stops on all levels at Keyframe 2.
> ———— Run Cursor
Register 8
1:00
5
KF
2
TIME
RUN
RUN DEL
START
KF
TIMELINE MENU
8 Keyframes
Duration 7:00
6
KF editing enabled
Master Timeline
1
2
3
4
7
8
EFF DUR
M/E 1
M/E 2
BKGD
4:00
5:00
SELECT
ZOOM
1.0X
DELEGATES
ENABLES
PAUSE
NO PAUSE
LAST
PAN / ZOOM
MOD ALL
ABSOLUTE
TIME ALIGN
LEVELS
SET
START TIME
10. Press Run again. The run proceeds to the pause programmed
at keyframe 4 on the BKGD level.
11. Press Run again. All levels of the effect run to the end of the
effect (keyframe 8).
3-98
Keyframe Menu
Effect Run with Auto Run On (Independent Timelines Enabled)
12. Turn on Auto Run and rewind the effect.
13. Press Run.
Note that when a run is performed while Auto Run is on (Auto
Run pushbutton lit), runs are made on the enabled
independent timelines (regardless of delegation), not on the
Master Timeline. In the example, the M/E 1 and BKGD levels
run to their respective pauses and stop, while the M/E 2 effect
runs to the end of its timeline. See Figure 4.
> ———— Run Cursor
Register 8
0:00
5
KF
1
TIME
RUN
RUN DEL
START
KF
TIMELINE MENU
8 Keyframes
Duration 7:00
6
KF editing enabled
Master Timeline
1
2
3
4
7
8
EFF DUR
M/E 1
M/E 2
BKGD
4:00
5:00
SELECT
ZOOM
1.0X
DELEGATES
ENABLES
PAUSE
NO PAUSE
LAST
PAN / ZOOM
MOD ALL
ABSOLUTE
TIME ALIGN
LEVELS
SET
START TIME
14. Press Run again. The M/E 1 and BKGD levels run to the end of
their independent timelines, while the M/E 2 effect remains at
the end of its timeline.
NOTE: During a Run, independent timelines stop and remain at their
respective last keyframe. If all timelines are at their end, then the next
Run command restarts all timelines in sync from the beginning of the
timeline.
3-99
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
NOTE: With Auto Run on and Independent Timelines running, the
Master Timeline remains at its first Keyframe (or zero time). When the
Independent Timelines arrive at their last keyframe, the Independent
Timelines are “skewed” from the Master Timeline position, and all
Timeline edits are disabled. For you to enable a Keyframe edit, press
REWIND or GO TO KF and the Master and Independent Timelines sync,
allowing further Timeline editing.
Lever Arm Scaling
■
■
Run the effect with the lever arm.
Note that each partial run to the next pause is scaled to
full scale of the lever arm. This is true whether Auto Run
is on or off.
Keyframe Runs in a Sequence
Remember that you must have Auto Run on when you Run a
sequence in order for the keyframe effects in the recalled registers
to run when the sequence is recalled.
Note that, with Auto Run on, any Recalled effect that has a pause
programmed at any enabled keyframe causes the effect in only
that level—and the sequence—to pause.
Pause on First or Last Keyframe
A Pause on the first keyframe with Auto Run on causes the effect
on that level to not run. Occasions on which the presence of a
pause on the first or last keyframe becomes significant are as
follows:
■
If the first keyframe on a timeline has a pause and a new
keyframe is inserted before it, the second keyframe will then
have a pause that will affect the running of the effect
3-100
Keyframe Menu
■
■
If the last keyframe on a timeline has a pause and a new
keyframe is inserted after it, the next-to-last keyframe will
then have the pause.
If the first keyframe on an individual level’s timeline has a
pause and the beginning of that timeline is skewed with
respect to the beginning of the overall effect, the effect stops
on that pause if the effect is running on the Master Timeline
(Auto Run off).
■
If the last keyframe on an individual level’s timeline has a
pause and that timeline is not as long as the overall effect, the
entire effect stops on that pause if the effect is running on the
Master Timeline (Auto Run off).
TIME ALIGN LEVELS — Adjusts the start times of all delegated
levels so that their current times align.
SET START TIME — Sets the start time (time of the first keyframe)
of all delegated levels to the time of the cursor. The relative timing
of all keyframes within a level remains unchanged; only the start
times of delegated levels are changed.
TIME SELECT — Selects the function of the TIME knob, as follows:
RUN — Runs the current effect with the delegated soft knob.
Usage is the same as the E-MEM subpanel RUN button. Only
enabled levels are activated in this operation.
RUN DEL — Runs multiple keyframe effects in their relative
time position.
START — Adds a delay to where the keyframe begins.
KF —“Slides” a delegated keyframe timeline relative to the
next/ previous keyframe. Durations remain fixed. If CONST
DUR is set, the overall effect duration is unaffected.
EFF DUR — “Slides “ the overall effect duration; scales the
delegated levels.
NOTE: Other soft button and soft knob functions that appear in the
Timeline Menu under specific conditions are discussed in the User
Guide.
3-101
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Aux Menu
Press the aux bus top level menu button to select the Aux Bus
Menu. Use this menu to select looping mode on Aux Buses 1 and 2
(when used with the Effects Send feature), or to deselect looping
mode.
AUX MENU
/aux bus
PVW BUS
MASK BUS
PVW
MASK
–
–
1
2
–
–
ME/ 1
3
AUX BUS 1 AUX BUS 1
AUX BUS 2 AUX BUS 2
EXT LOOP
EXT LOOP
EXT LOOP
–
–
–
–
VIDEO
= 16
AUX BUS 3
AUX BUS 3
16
–
–
AUX BUS 4 FRAMESTORE
S/16
–
–
AUX BUS 4
–
–
–
–
–
AUX BUS 5 AUX BUS 5
AUX BUS 6 AUX BUS 6
AUX BUS 7 AUX BUS 7
AUX BUS 8 AUX BUS 8
AUX BUS 9 AUX BUS 9
–
–
KEY
= S/16
–
–
–
–
LOGICAL
PHYSICAL
VIDEO XPT
KEY XPT
NO LOOP
EXT LOOP
AUX 1
AUX BUS 4
FRAMESTORE
LOG AUX
SELECT
EFX LOOP
MODE
TAKE
The following selections are available from the Aux Menu:
BUS SELECT — Selects the physical aux bus to be used in the
effects send loop.
Both the logical and physical Aux Bus numbers are displayed
on the Aux Bus Menu in the BUS SELECT column. Logical
buses are those bus numbers that are assigned to physical
buses via control panel and software menus. Physical buses
are the actual bus outputs. Physical buses are assigned to
logical buses (that is, physical buses can be moved; logical
buses may not). In the BUS SELECT column, the physical bus
is shown in parentheses.
3-102
Aux Menu
EFX LOOP MODE — Turns the effects send loop on EXT LOOP or
off NO LOOP.
The E-MEM CONTROL column activates E-MEM recalls for the
BUS SELECT choice. You must assign the Aux Bus to MISC, or a
DPM level, on the Config/ Extern IF/ DPM Setup/ Map Aux Buses
Menu.
PVW and MASK recall control may be disabled, but they are
always assigned to the MISC E-MEM level.
NOTE: Buses assigned to Kaleidoscope or Krystal are under their
control and are not effected by the switcher’s E-MEM system. Therefore,
E-MEM recall control is not possible with those buses.
If the Aux Bus Menu is delegated to Kaleidoscope, the Near Side,
Far Side, and Both Side selections are enabled.
NEAR SIDE — the NEAR SIDE column indicates which side you
will be changing the input to.
FAR SIDE — the FAR SIDE will be changing to the opposite side
or the side you don’t see. If FRONT is visible (displayed in the
NEAR SIDE column), then BACK is the FAR side.
BOTH SIDES — Use BOTH SIDES if you want to use the same
video image on both Near and Far sides (default selection).
TAKE — Source changes may be made with the Aux button row
on the Control Panel, a Remote Aux Panel, or the TAKE button on
the Aux Bus Menu. The selection that will be acted upon next is
shown by a highlighted menu button, and in the APPLY
CHANGES TO column on the Aux Bus Menu.
3-103
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Mask Menu
Press the mask button to select the Mask menu. Use this menu to
adjust the opacity of the inhibit mask and turn the chroma trap on
or off.
INHIBIT MASK OPACITY
= 100%
MASK MENU
mask
KEY1
OFF
ON
M/E 1
KEY2
M/E 1
M/E2
ON
KEY 2
OFF
M/E
SELECT
BUS
SELECT
INH MASK
OPACITY
The Mask menu selections are:
KEYER SELECT — Delegates a keyer for the following
selections.
INH MASK OPACITY — Enables or disables the INHIBIT MASK
OPACITY soft knob.
INHIBIT MASK OPACITY — Adjusts opacity of the inhibit
mask. Available only for Key 1 and Key 2 in the M/ Es.
3-104
Matte Menu
Matte Menu
Press the matte button to select the Matte menu. Use this menu to
adjust the luminance level of Backgrounds 1 and 2 down to
superblack, and to adjust the user-definable wash angle.
USER DEF
WASH ANGLE
= 45 degrees
MATTE MENU
matte
SUPERBLK SUPERBLK
ON
NORMAL
NORMAL
OFF
BKGD 1
LUM
BKGD 2
LUM
USER DEF
WASH ANGLE
MATTE
COPY >
TEXTURE >
The following menu selections are accessible through the Matte
menu:
BKGD 1 LUM and BKGD 2 LUM — Enables or disables luminance
adjustment down to superblack with the Background 1 and/ or
Background 2 LUM controls.
USER DEF WASH ANGLE — Enables the WASH ANGLE soft knob.
matte copy> — Open the Matte Copy menu.
3-105
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Matte Copy Menu
From the Matte menu, press the matte copy> button to display the
Matte Copy menu. This menu is used to copy or swap all Matte
settings from one Matte Generator to another.
MATTE COPY MENU
matte / matte copy
COPY MATTE 2 OF M/E 1 KEY 1 FILL
TO
MATTE 1 OF M/E 1 KEY 1 FILL
SWAP MATTE 2 OF M/E 1 KEY 1 FILL WITH MATTE 1 OF M/E 1 KEY 1 FILL
KEY 1 FILL
KEY 1 BORD
KEY 2 FILL
KEY 1 FILL
KEY 1 BORD
KEY 2 FILL
KEY 2 BORD
PRI WIPE
2 TO 1
1 TO 2
M/E 1
M/E 2
BKGD
KEY 2 BORD MATTE 1
M/E 1
M/E 2
BKGD
PRI WIPE
SEC WIPE
MATTE 2
BOTH
SEC WIPE
FROM
GROUP
FROM
MATTE GEN
SIDE
SELECT
TO
GROUP
TO
DO MATTE
SWAP
DO MATTE
COPY
MATTE GEN
The following menu selections are accessible through the Matte
Copy menu:
FROM GROUP — Selects the M/ E to copy or swap from.
FROM MATTE GEN — Selects the Matte Generator to copy or swap
from.
SIDE SELECT — Selects the source and destination mattes for
copying or swapping. (Each Matte Generator has two mattes.)
TO GROUP — Selects the M/ E to copy or swap to.
TO MATTE GEN — Selects the Matte Generator to copy or swap to.
DO MATTE SWAP — Initiates the matte swap currently selected.
DO MATTE COPY — Initiates the matte copy currently selected.
3-106
Frame Store Menu
NOTE: An UNDO function appears in the menu after a Copy or Swap
operation has been initiated. The Undo must be performed before exiting
the menu in order to take effect.
Press exit to return to the Matte menu.
Frame Store Menu
The Frame Store menu and submenus include operational
settings for the Frame Store Option.
FRAME STORE MENU
frame store
VIDEO PAGE SELECT
PAGE 1 PAGE 2 PAGE 3 PAGE 4
KEY PAGE SELECT
PAGE 1 PAGE 2 PAGE 3 PAGE 4
SHADOW BLUR
= 0.0%
ON
ON
SHADOW BLUR SYMMETRY
= 0%
OFF
OFF
DRP SHADOW
BLUR
LOCK
VIDEO/KEY
PICTURE
PROCESS>
PARAM
COPY >
VIDEO
STORE >
KEY
STORE >
DRP SHADOW BLUR — Turns on or off the Frame Store Drop
Shadow blur and enables the shadow blur adjustment knobs.
SHADOW BLUR — Adjusts the amount of blur to be applied to
the Drop Shadow.
SHADOW BLUR SYMMETRY — Adjusts the ratio of vertical to
horizontal blur on the Drop Shadow. When set to 0.0, the
vertical and horizontal blur are equal.
3-107
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
LOCKVIDEO/KEY — Causes the key store to follow any parameter
change that you make in the associated video store.
PICTURE COPY> — Opens the Picture Copy menu. Use to copy or
swap picture settings.
PARAM COPY> — Opens the Parameter Copy menu. Use to copy
or swap parameter settings.
VIDEO STORE> — Opens the Video Store menu.
KEY STORE> —Opens the Key Store menu.
Frame Store Picture Process Menu
The Frame Store Picture Process Menu is used to enhance Frame
Store image manipulation.
Compress, Filter, Bevel, and Copy functions are available on this
menu.
VIDEO PAGE SELECT
FRAME STORE MENU
frame store
PAGE 1 PAGE 2 PAGE 3 PAGE 4
KEY PAGE SELECT
PAGE 1 PAGE 2 PAGE 3 PAGE 4
AUX 2 feeds the Frame Store
SHADOW BLUR
= 0.0%
ON
ON
SHADOW BLUR SYMMETRY
= 0%
OFF
OFF
KEY
DRP SHADOW
BLUR
LOCK
VIDEO/KEY
PICTURE
COPY >
PARAM
COPY >
VIDEO
STORE>
KEY
STORE >
MASK
STORE >
2200
3-108
Frame Store Menu
Compress — The Compress operation will compress the FROM
page to the TO page. The compressed image will end up in the
upper left-hand corner of the TO page.
The key from the corresponding FROM page in the Key Store can
be processed in one of three ways.
Create — This will make a 4x3 key in the corresponding TO Key
Store page that is the same size as the compressed video. Use this
option if the FROM video is a full-screen image. Set up the Frame
Store to output Shaped video in this mode.
Compress — Use this option to compress titles and other keys.
This will compress the corresponding FROM Key Store page the
same as the Video Store page.
None — This selection does nothing with or to the Key Store
pages.
When using Compress, it is best to lock the key to the video. Also,
if the edges have blanking the Crop function is useful. It is also
useful to note the repositioning of compressed video will run in
realtime.
NOTE: Compress works only on still frozen video.
Filter — Filter only affects the luma of the video page. You can
select one of the following filter options. You will want to
experiment with them to achieve the desired effect.
NOTE: For a better looking Emboss effect, Soften the image first before
using Emboss.
■
Emboss — Use for image edge enhancement and shading;
gives image a 3D appearance.
■
■
Sharpen — Sharpens the image.
Soften — Softens the image.
3-109
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
With the filter type selected, press the DO FILTER soft button as
many times as applicable to implement the effect.
NOTE: Multiple button pushes are stored in a buffer. The buffer will
continue to increment even if you have finished pressing buttons. It may
take up to 30 seconds to complete five passes.
Bevel — Bevel gives an image a “lighted picture frame” in a 3-D
type of effect. The BRIGHTNESS soft knob controls the quantity
of light projected on the frame. BEVELWIDTH controls the width
of the frame. The LIGHT SOURCE button selects where the light
comes from: Bottom, Top, Right, or Left.
NOTE: This should be used on a full 4x3 image. The results may look
strange otherwise.
Copy — Use COPY from the PROCESS choices to copy or swap
to and from video and key store pages.
Lock Video/Key — When ON, the Key Store> selection button is
disabled (invisible).
3-110
Frame Store Menu
Parameter Copy Menu
Use the Parameter Copy menu to copy or swap all parameter
settings from video to video, key to key, or video to key.
FRAME STORE PARAMETER COPY MENU
frame store / parameter copy
COPY PARAMETERS FROM
SWAP PARAMETERS FROM
TO
KEY STORE
KEY STORE
VIDEO STORE
VIDEO STORE
WITH
VIDEO STORE
KEY STORE
VIDEO STORE
KEY STORE
FROM
STORE
TO
STORE
DO
SWAP
DO
COPY
The Parameter Copy menu selections are:
FROM STORE — Selects the store to copy/ swap from.
TO STORE — Selects the store to copy/ swap to.
DO SWAP — Initiates the Picture swap currently selected.
DO COPY — Initiates the Picture copy currently selected.
3-111
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Video Store Menu
The Video Store menu allows you to select the page, set the strobe
period, and provides access to Video Store positioning and
pseudo color controls.
VIDEO STORE MENU
frame store / video store
PAGE SELECT
PAGE 1 PAGE 2 PAGE 3 PAGE 4
4 FIELD
2 FIELD
INTERPOLATE
REPLICATE
FRAME
TYPE
PSEUDO
COLOR >
INTERPOLATE
MOSAIC >
CROP > REPOSITION > FILTER >
INterpolate — Select how the video data is to be interpreted. For
example, interpolate evaluates screen lines 1 and 3 and averages
them to get line 2. Replicate copies line 1 to create line 2, line 3 to
create line 4, etc.
3-112
Frame Store Menu
STROBE — When ON is selected, Strobe is activated. Strobe
alternates between a frozen Frame Store image and a selected
source image with the frequency set by the soft knobs described
below. The difference between the time settings is what varies the
strobe effect.
STROBE TIME PERIOD — Sets the time (in fields) for the
delegated video source to be displayed. Minimum time
period is 4 fields.
STROBE FREEZE PERIOD — Sets the time (in fields) during
which the frozen frame store is displayed. Minimum time
period is 8 fields.
PAGE SELECT — Selects one of four pages (frames) of the video
image.
MOSAIC> — Opens the Video Store Mosaic menu.
PSEUDOCOLOR> — Opens the Video Store Pseudo Color Menu.
crop> — Opens the Video Store Crop menu.
REPOSITION> — Opens the Video Store Reposition menu.
FILTER> — Opens the Video Store Filter menu.
3-113
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Video Store Mosaic Menu
This menu allows you to apply and adjust a mosaic pattern to the
video store video.
VIDEO STORE MOSAIC MENU
frame store / video store / mosaic
MOSAIC SIZE
= 50%
MOSAIC ASPECT
= 0.00
FIRST ACTIVE PIXEL
= 0
ON
OFF
MOSAIC
MOSAIC — Turns on the mosaic feature and enables the mosaic
adjustment soft knobs.
MOSAIC SIZE — Adjusts the width of the mosaic area, up to
100% of the screen.
MOSAIC ASPECT — Adjusts the vertical-to-horizontal aspect
of the mosaic area.
FIRST ACTIVE PIXEL — Adjusts the positioning of the left edge
of the mosaic area.
3-114
Frame Store Menu
Video Store Pseudo Color Menu
The Pseudo Color menu allows you to select normal or reversed
video, and several pseudocolor modes. The mode selected
determines the functions of the fourth and fifth soft buttons and
the soft knobs.
The following illustration is the appearance of the Video Store
Pseudo Color menu when POSTR/SOLR is selected.
POSTERIZATION
VIDEO STORE PSEUDO COLOR MENU
frame store / video store / pseudo color
= 0.0
SOLARIZATION
= 0.0
POSTR/SOLR
HUE MOD
ON
ON
ON
ON
COLOR MOD
CONTRAST
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
REVERSE
VIDEO
UNSHAPE/
RESHAPE
MODE
SELECT
POSTERIZE SOLARIZE
REVERSE VIDEO — Turns reverse video on or off, which inverts
the luminance (white and black are reversed) and places each hue
180° away from its original color.
UNSHAPE/RESHAPE — Allows shaped video (of a video/ key
pair) to be unshaped before being bitmapped, then reshaped after
bitmapping. This button appears only if Key Store is configured as
Key.
MODE SELECT — Selects one of four pseudocolor modes, as
described on the following pages.
3-115
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Posterization/Solarization
Selecting POSTR/SOLR mode provides adjustment of the
posterization and solarization parameters.
POSTERIZE — Causes the luminance values of a frozen image to
be changed from a continuous scale to a limited(adjustable)
number of steps.
POSTERIZATION — Adjusts the number of steps of luminance.
SOLARIZE — Causes the chrominance values of a frozen image to
be changed from a continuous scale to a limited(adjustable)
number of steps.
SOLARIZATION — Adjusts the number of steps of
chrominance.
Pseudo Color Hue Modification
3-116
Frame Store Menu
The following illustration is the appearance of the Pseudo Color
menu when HUE MOD is selected.
HUE MOD START PHASE
VIDEO STORE PSEUDO COLOR MENU
frame store / video store / pseudo color
= 0.0
HUE MOD END PHASE
= 0.0
HUE MOD SATURATION
= 0.0
POSTR/SOLR
HUE MOD
ON
ON
COLOR MOD
CONTRAST
ON
CW
OFF
CCW
OFF
OFF
REVERSE
VIDEO
UNSHAPE/
RESHAPE
MODE
SELECT
HUE
MOD
HUE MOD
PATH
HUE MOD — Enables the hue modification feature, which strips
chroma from the stored image and substitutes a spectrum of
colors for the resulting black and white. Also enables the soft
knobs for adjustment of the colors to be substituted.
HUE MOD START PHASE and HUE MOD END PHASE — Adjust
the starting color and ending color of the spectrum to be
substituted for black and white.
HUE MOD SATURATION — Adjusts the saturation of the color
spectrum to be substituted.
HUE MOD PATH — Sets the direction of the hue substitution
from black to white, as viewed on a vectorscope.
Pseudo Color Modification
3-117
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
The following illustration is the appearance of the Pseudo Color
menu when COLOR MOD is selected. This menu provides
adjustment of the color modification parameters.
VIDEO STORE PSEUDO COLOR MENU
frame store / video store / pseudo color
BLACK HUE
= 0.0
BLACK SAT
= 0.0
BLACK BRIGHT
= 0.0
POSTR/SOLR
HUE MOD
ON
ON
COLOR MOD
CONTRAST
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
REVERSE
VIDEO
UNSHAPE/
RESHAPE
MODE
SELECT
COLOR
MOD
BLK/WHT
DELEGATE
COLOR MOD — Enables the color modification feature, which
strips chroma from the stored image, then substitutes two colors
for the black and white limits of the resulting image.
BLK/WHT DELEGATE — Delegates the soft knobs for adjustment of
the color to be substituted.
BLACK HUE, BLACK SAT, and BLACK BRIGHT or WHITE HUE,
WHITE SAT, and WHITE BRIGHT — Adjust the color and
luminance of the colors to be substituted for the black and
white portions of the signal.
Pseudo Color Contrast
3-118
Frame Store Menu
The following illustration is the appearance of the Pseudo Color
menu when CONTRAST is selected.
CONTRAST LUM SLOPE
VIDEO STORE PSEUDO COLOR MENU
frame store / video store / pseudo color
= 0.0
CONTRAST LUM RANGE
= 0
CONTRAST SATURATION
= 0.0
POSTR/SOLR
HUE MOD
ON
ON
COLOR MOD
CONTRAST
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
REVERSE
VIDEO
UNSHAPE/
RESHAPE
MODE
SELECT
CONTRAST
CONTRAST — Turns on the contrast function and enables the
contrast adjustment knobs. Adjustment of these controls is highly
subjective and depends on the characteristics of the image and the
desires of the operator.
CONTRAST LUM SLOPE — Adjusts the luminance contrast of
the stored video.
CONTRAST LUM RANGE — Adjusts the luminance offset of
the video.
CONTRAST SATURATION — Adjusts the saturation of the
video chrominance.
Video Store Crop Menu
3-119
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
This menu allows you to crop (mask) portions of the stored video.
VIDEO STORE CROP MENU
frame store / video store / crop
TOP
= 0.00 screen units
BOTTOM
= 0.00 screen units
LEFT
= 0.00 screen units
ON
RIGHT
= 0.00 screen units
OFF
CROP
CROP — Turns on the crop feature and enables the soft knob
adjustments for positioning the crop.
TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT, and RIGHT — Adjust the limits of the
crop for the stored video.
3-120
Frame Store Menu
Video Store Reposition Menu
This menu allows positioning of the video store output image.
VIDEO STORE REPOSITION MENU
frame store / video store / reposition
Coarse Adjust Horizontal
= 0.0000 Screen Units
(0.00 Pixels)
Blur is currently ON.
Position values are limited to
4 Line, 1 Pixel boundaries
Fine Adjust Horizontal
Coarse Adjust Vertical
= 0.0000 Screen Units
(0.00 Lines)
Fine Adjust Vertical
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
HORIZONTAL VERTICAL
POSITION POSITION
PIXEL
DETENT
RESTORE
DEFAULTS
HORIZONTAL POSITION — Enables or disables horizontal
positioning of the stored (frozen or unfrozen) image.
Coarse Adjust Horizontal and Fine Adjust Horizontal soft knobs
— Adjust the horizontal position of the image.
VERTICAL POSITION — Enables or disables vertical positioning of
the stored (frozen or unfrozen) image.
Coarse Adjust Vertical and Fine Adjust Vertical soft knobs —
Adjust the vertical position of the image.
RESTORE DEFAULTS — Returns the image to the original position.
3-121
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Video Store Filter Menu (Blur)
The Video Store Filter menu allows you to apply either a blur or
hue rotate to the video store output image.
FILTER SELECT — Selects either BLUR or HUE ROTATE filter mode.
Following is the appearance of the menu when BLUR is selected.
VIDEO STORE FILTER MENU
frame store / video store / filter
LUM BLUR
0%
CHROMA BLUR
0%
BLUR SYMMETRY
0%
BLUR
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
HUE ROTATE
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
FILTER
SELECT
SEPARATE
LUM/CHROMA
LUM
BLUR
CHROMA
BLUR
BLUR
SYMMETRY
BLUR
BLUR — Turns on the blur filter mode.
SEPARATE LUM/CHROMA — Allows separate adjustment of
luminance blur and chrominance blur applied to the video store
image.
LUM BLUR — Enables the LUM BLUR adjustment.
LUM BLUR — Adjust the amount of luminance blur applied to
the image.
3-122
Frame Store Menu
CHROMA BLUR — Enables the CHROMA BLUR adjustment.
CHROMA BLUR — Adjusts the amount of chrominance blur
applied to the video store image.
BLUR SYMMETRY — Enables the BLUR SYMMETRY horizontal
adjustment.
BLUR SYMMETRY — Adjusts the vertical proportions of
luminance and chrominance blur.
Video Store Filter Menu (Hue Rotate)
This is the appearance of the Video Store Filter menu when HUE
ROTATE is selected.
VIDEO STORE FILTER MENU
frame store / video store / filter
HUE ANGLE
0 deg
BLUR
ON
HUE ROTATE
OFF
FILTER
SELECT
HUE
ROTATE
HUE ROTATE — Turns on the hue rotate filter mode which rotates
the chrominance as observed on a Vectorscope.
HUE ANGLE — Adjusts the angle of hue rotation.
3-123
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Key Store Menu
The Key Store menu allows you to select the page, set the strobe
period, and provides access to Key Store positioning.
KEY STORE MENU
frame store / key store
PAGE SELECT
PAGE 1 PAGE 2 PAGE 3 PAGE 4
STROBE TIME PERIOD
= 20
STROBE FREEZE PERIOD
= 10
ON
2 FIELD
OFF
STROBE
CROP > REPOSITION > FILTER >
STROBE — When ON is selected, Strobe is activated.
STROBE TIME PERIOD — Sets the time for the Strobe.
STROBE FREEZE PERIOD — Sets the time for the Strobe to
freeze.
PAGE SELECT — Selects one of four pages (frames) of the key
image.
CROP> — Opens the Key Store Crop menu.
REPOSITION> — Opens the Key Store Reposition menu.
FILTER> — Opens the Key Store Filter menu.
3-124
Frame Store Menu
Key Store Crop Menu
This menu allows you to crop (mask) portions of the stored key.
KEY STORE CROP MENU
frame store / key store / crop
TOP
= 0.00 screen units
BOTTOM
= 0.00 screen units
LEFT
= 0.00 screen units
ON
RIGHT
= 0.00 screen units
OFF
CROP
CROP —Turns on the crop feature and enables the soft knob
adjustments for positioning the crop.
TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT, and RIGHT — Adjust the limits of the
crop for the stored key.
3-125
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Key Store Reposition Menu
This menu allows positioning of the key store output image.
KEY STORE REPOSITION MENU
frame store / key store / reposition
Coarse Adjust Horizontal
= 0.0000 Screen Units
0 Pixels)
Blur is currently ON.
Position values are limited to
4 Line, 1 Pixel boundaries
Fine Adjust Horizontal
Coarse Adjust Vertical
= 0.0000 Screen Units
(0 Lines)
ON
ON
ON
Fine Adjust Vertical
OFF
OFF
OFF
HORIZONTAL VERTICAL
POSITION POSITION
PIXEL
DETENT
RESTORE
DEFAULTS
HORIZONTAL POSITION — Enables or disables horizontal
positioning of the stored key.
Coarse Adjust Horizontal and Fine Adjust Horizontal soft knobs
— Adjust the horizontal position of the key.
VERTICAL POSITION — Enables or disables vertical positioning of
the stored (frozen or unfrozen) key.
Coarse Adjust Vertical and Fine Adjust Vertical soft knobs —
Adjust the vertical position of the key.
RESTORE DEFAULTS — Returns the key to the original position.
3-126
Frame Store Menu
Key Store Filter Menu (Blur — Video Mode)
The Key Store Filter menu allows you to apply a blur to the key
store output.
Following is the appearance of the menu when BLUR is selected.
KEY STORE FILTER MENU
frame store / key store / filter
LUM BLUR
0%
BLUR SYMMETRY
0%
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
BLUR
SYMMETRY
BLUR
BLUR — Turns on the blur filter mode.
BLUR SYMMETRY — Enables the BLUR SYMMETRY adjustment.
BLUR SYMMETRY — Adjusts the proportions of horizontal
and vertical blur.
3-127
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Miscellaneous Menu
Press the MISC button to select the Misc menu.
MISC MENU
/misc
SAFE
TITLE>
SIGNAL
PROCESS>
The following menu selections are accessible through the
Miscellaneous menu:
SIGNAL PROCESS > — Opens the Signal Process menu, which
allows you to select Key Filter and Dither modes.
SAFETITLE > — Opens the Safe Title menu, which allows you to
turn on or off safe title and select a safe title pattern.
3-128
Miscellaneous Menu
Signal Processing Menu
From the Miscellaneous menu, press the signal Processing>
button to display the Signal Processing menu. Use the Signal
Processing menu to turn Key Filter, Dither and Matte Dither
modes on or off.
SIGNAL PROCESS MENU
LUM GAIN
= 5.0
/misc/signal_process
CHROMA GAIN
= 15.9
DC OFFSET
=-20.0 IRE
OFF
FREE RUN
OFF
ON
FREE RUN
OFF
FRAME LOCK FRAME LOCK
KEY
FILTER
MATTE
DITHER
DITHER
The Signal Processing menu selections are as follows:
KEY FILTER — Enables/ disables Key Filter mode.
DITHER — Selects Frame Lock, Free Run, or Off for 8-bit digital
outputs.
MATTE DITHER — Selects Frame Lock, Free Run, or Off for 8-bit
digital outputs for the matte signals.
3-129
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Safe Title Menu
From the Miscellaneous menu, press the safe title> button to
display the Safe Title menu. Use this menu to turn the Safe Title
mode on or off, select a safe title pattern, and adjust safe title
horizontal position. The functions of this menu appear only if the
Safe Title option is installed.
SAFE TITLE MENU
SAFE TITLE H-POSITION
/misc/safe_title
=
+ 25 clocks
SAFE TITLE
SCREEN CTR
ON
TITLE & CTR
X-HATCH
ON
PPGGMM
PVW
OFF
OFF
SAFE
TITLE
SAFE TITLE
SELECT
SAFE TITLE SAFE TITLE
POSITION OUTPUT
The Safe Title menu selections are:
SAFE TITLE — Turns the Safe Title Generator preview monitor
display on or off.
SAFE TITLE SELECT — Selects a safe title pattern. This soft
button appears only when SAFE TITLE is on.
SAFE TITLE H-POSITION — Positions safe title horizontally. This
soft knob appears only when SAFE TITLE is on.
Press exit to return to the Miscellaneous menu.
3-130
Disk Menu
Disk Menu
Press the disk button to select the Disk menu. Use this menu for
disk and file management functions such as creating directories,
and loading and saving files.
The initial DISK menu appears as shown below when there is no
disk in the drive.
DISK MENU
/disk
FILE
SELECT
CURRENT DIRECTORY
/FLOPPY
TOTAL BYTES
0
FILENAME
FLOPPY
EXT
BYTES
<DEV>
DATE
TIME
MARKED FILES
# FILES
0
# BYTES
0
CHILD
DIRECTORY
UTILS >
CHILD DIRECTORY — Causes the system to read a diskette in the
disk drive and to list the parent directory of the diskette.
3-131
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Pressing CHILD DIRECTORY re-displays the menu with additional
functions, such as in the sample menu below:
DISK MENU
/disk
FILE
SELECT
CURRENT DIRECTORY
/FLOPPY
TOTAL BYTES
0
FILENAME
/FLOPPY
EXT
BYTES
<DEV>
DATE
TIME
MARKED FILES
# FILES
0
# BYTES
0
VIEW BY
NAME
LIST
PARENT
LOAD
FILE >
SAVE
FILE >
MARK FILE
FOR DELETE
DIRECTORY DIRECTORY
DELETE >
UTILS >
LIST DIRECTORY — Causes the system to re-read the directory of
the diskette in the disk drive.
PARENT DIRECTORY — Backs out from a subdirectory to the
parent directory.
LOAD FILE> — Invoke the Load File menu. If a subdirectory is
selected (see FILE SELECT below), the CHILD DIRECTORY label
appears instead of LOAD FILE>.
SAVE FILE> — Invokes the Save File menu.
MARK FILE FOR DELETE — Marks files so that they may deleted
simultaneous. (Does not enable simultaneous loading or saving of
files.)
DELETE> — Invokes the Confirm Delete menu which allows you
to DO DELETE or CANCEL. Either a single selected file or a number
of marked files can be deleted.
3-132
Disk Menu
UTILS> — Opens the Utilities menu.
FILE SELECT — Moves the selection box through the list of files
in the directory to select the file or directory to be acted upon by
subsequent operations.
VIEW BY NAME/EXT/DIR — Allows the directory to be listed in
alphabetical order by file name or by extension, or to just list
subdirectories. The display changes automatically as the new
selection is made.
After the diskette directory has been read, the display may look
something like the following example:
DISK MENU
/disk
FILE
SELECT
CURRENT DIRECTORY
/FLOPPY
TOTAL BYTES
8004
FILENAME
EXT
BYTES
45548
52665
55817
DATE
TIME
MARKED FILES
BOOT
ABS
FEB 10 1994
09:20
# FILES
0
# BYTES
COMM1
CMP
FEB 10, 1994
08:31
0
COMM2
CMP
FEB 10, 1994
22:27
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
LIST
PARENT
LOAD
FILE >
SAVE
FILE >
MARK FILE
FOR DELETE
DIRECTORY DIRECTORY
DELETE >
UTILS >
3-133
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Load File Menu
From the Disk menu, press the Load file> button to display the
Load File menu. This menu will only display if the selected file is
an E-MEM register.
LOAD FILE MENU
disk / load file
Load file:
/FLOPPY/ABLE.R01
E-MEM
LOAD
SELECT
E-MEM
BANK
E-MEM
ALL
E-MEM
REGISTER
NO LOAD
LOAD
NO LOAD
LOAD
NO LOAD
NO LOAD
LOAD
NO LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
DPMs
1-4
DO
LOAD
M/E 1
M/E 2
MISC
BKGD
M/E 1 through DPMs 1-4 — Include or omit portions of the selected
file before loading it from disk into the switcher.
E-MEM LOAD SELECT — Enables loading of the selected E-MEM
REGISTER, the E-MEM BANK containing the selected register, or E-
MEM ALL (all 100 E-MEM registers).
NOTE: It takes approximately 6 minutes to load all 100 registers, even
if most of them are empty. You may prefer to load only specific banks.
DO LOAD — Brings up the Confirm File Load menu, which allows
you to DO LOAD or CANCEL.
3-134
Disk Menu
If the selected file is a Configuration file instead of an E-MEM file,
the Load File menu displays as follows:
LOAD FILE MENU
disk/load file
Load file:/FLOPPY/NEWS.CFG
NO LOAD
LOAD
NO LOAD
LOAD
NO LOAD
LOAD
NO LOAD
LOAD
NO LOAD
LOAD
NO LOAD
LOAD
USER
PREFS
SYSTEM
PARAMS
EXTERNAL
OUTPUTS INTERFACE
CLR WK
BUF
DO
LOAD
INPUTS
USER PREFS through EXTERN I/F — Include or omit portions of
the selected file or buffer before loading it into the switcher.
DO LOAD — Invokes the Confirm File Load menu, which allows
you to DO LOAD or CANCEL.
Press exit to return to the Disk menu.
3-135
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Save File Menu
From the Disk menu, press the save file> button to display the
Save File menu. This menu is used to save selected portions of E-
MEM register data or Configuration data to disk. You can also
choose the type of save, the number of registers to be saved, and
invoke the Name File sub-menu.
SAVE FILE MENU
/disk/save_file
CURRENT DIRECTORY
/FLOPPY
TOTAL BYTES
8004
REGISTER
= 24
SYSTEM
E-MEM
REGISTER
E-MEM
BANK
E-MEM
ALL
SAVE
SELECT
NO SAVE
SAVE
NO SAVE
SAVE
NO SAVE
NO SAVE
SAVE
NO SAVE
SAVE
NO SAVE
SAVE
SAVE
PGM-PST
DSK
DPMs
1-4
NAME
FILE >
ME 1
ME 2
ME 3
MISC
BKGD
M/E 1 through DPMs 1-4 — Select portions of the E-MEM register
data or switcher Configuration data to be included or omitted
when saving it to disk.
SAVE SELECT — Selects the type of save to be done.
REGISTER = — Selects a single register to be saved. When E-MEM
BANK is selected, 10 registers at a time can be saved. When E-MEM
ALL is selected, all 100 registers may be saved in one operation.
3-136
Disk Menu
NAME FILE> — Invokes the Name File menu in order to name the
file(s) that you wish to create on the disk. For an E-MEM file, an
automatic extension is added to the file name on the disk (for
example, R24 for register 24). If an E-MEM bank of all E-MEM
registers is saved, a separate file is created on the disk for each
E-MEM register.
If CONFIG is selected in the Save File menu, the menu looks like
this:
SAVE FILE MENU
disk/save file
CURRENT DIRECTORY
/FLOPPY
TOTAL BYTES
8004
E-MEM
REGISTER
E-MEM
BANK
E-MEM
ALL
CONFIG
NO SAVE
SAVE
NO SAVE
SAVE
NO SAVE
SAVE
NO SAVE
SAVE
NO SAVE
SAVE
NO SAVE
SAVE
USER
PREFS
SYSTEM
PARAMS
EXTERNAL
OUTPUTS INTERFACE
CLR WK
BUF
NAME
FILE >
INPUTS
USER PREFS through Cur Wk Buf — Select portions of the
switcher Configuration data to be included or omitted when
saving it to disk.
NAME FILE> — Invokes the Name File menu to name the file you
wish to create on the disk. For a Configuration file, an automatic
extension of CFG is added to the file name on the disk.
3-137
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
Name File Menu
From the Save File menu, press the name file> button to display
the Name File menu. This menu is used to name files to be saved.
NAME FILE MENU
/disk/save_file/name_file
(
)
-
String Register:
USER
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
M
n
o
p
P
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
Save
String
Get
String
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K L
N
O
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W X
Y
Z
File Name:
WORKIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Character =
G
CURSOR
BACK
ACCEPT
CHAR
CURSOR
FORWARD
DELETE
CHAR
SAVE
STRING
GET
STRING
ACCEPT
NAME
When ACCEPT NAME is pressed, the Confirm File Save menu
displays, allowing you to DO SAVE or CANCEL. If a file with the
same name already exists in the directory, you will be warned of
that fact and given a third alternative, OVER WRITE, which will
write the new file over the existing file on the disk (the existing file
will be erased).
3-138
Disk Menu
Utilities Menu
From the Disk menu, press the utils> button to display the Utilities
menu. This menu is used to format disks and create subdirectories
in order to organize your saved files.
UTILITIES MENU
/disk/utils
CURRENT DIRECTORY
/
TOTAL BYTES
Ø
DISK USAGE
KBYTES
AVAIL
KBYTES
USED
%
USED
%
AVAIL
CREATE
DIR >
FORMAT
720K >
FORMAT
1.44M >
3-139
Section 3 — Menu Descriptions
FORMAT 720K and FORMAT 1.44M — Format a blank or
previously used disk in the appropriate format. (A 720K disk has
one write-protect tab; a 1.44M disk has two write-protect tabs.)
NOTE: Be sure to have the write-protect tab(s) set to off (closed) to allow
writing to the disk.
CREATE DIR> — Invokes the Name Directory menu, which
allows you to create subdirectories on the disk. This menu uses
the same format as the Name File menu.
Pressing CREATE DIR> to open the Name Directory menu. Press
ACCEPT NAME to either DO CREATE or CANCEL. If a duplicate
directory name already exists in the parent directory a warning is
issued and the Confirm Create Directory menu allows you to
RENAME or CANCEL.
To save files to a subdirectory, first create the subdirectory, then
have it open when you save the files that you wish to be in it. (To
open the subdirectory, select it with the FILE SELECT knob in the
next higher directory and press CHILD DIRECTORY.)
3-140
Menu Trees
4
Introduction
Many switcher features are accessed via software menus that are
displayed on the Menu Display. This display can show both
alphanumeric text and graphics.
Top Level Menu Buttons
The menu system is divided into groups of related menus. Any
particular group of menus can be accessed by pressing one of the
top level menu buttons located at the left of the menu display.
Each main menu button (except LAST MENU) brings up a main
menu, under which there may be sub-menus that allow selection
of less-frequently used options. (Some top level menus have no
sub-menus, or contain only one or two levels of sub-menus.)
Effect
Switcher
Effect
Config
Picture
Mixer
Config
M/E
Mode
Panel
Setup
Picture
Frame
Keyer
Chroma
Key
Pressing a top level menu button causes the soft button
assignments in the display to change specifically for that menu.
Effect
Oper
Key/
Stencil
Status
Wipe
E-MEM
Key
Frame
View
Run
Control
Input/
Output
Mask
Matte
Graphic
Display
Path
Aux
Bus
Frame
Store
Clear
Menu
Disk
Misc
4-1
Section 4— Menu Trees
Soft Buttons
The eight “soft” buttons located below the menu display allow
you to make function and sub-menu selections from menus
displayed on the screen. The symbol “>” following the name of a
soft button indicates that pressing that button will bring up a
lower-level menu.
A ninth button in the row is a dedicated EXIT button that allows
you to leave the menu you are in and return to the next higher
menu on the tree.
4-2
Menu Tree Structures
Menu Tree Structures
Tree-structure diagrams are presented on the following
pages for the top level menu buttons
CLEAR XPT
CLEAR BUS
LATCH
CLEAR SECTION
CLEAR SWCHR
NORMAL
M/E 1
M/E 2
AUX
ON
OFF
ON
ME 2 KEY DROP
KEY MEMORY
CLEAR KEY MEM
CLEAR XPT
CLEAR BUS
CLEAR SWCHR
MASK
OFF
SECTION SELECT
BUS SELECT
A
CLEAR XPT
B
CLEAR BUS
KEY 1
KEY 2
M/E 1
M/E 2
CLEAR SECTION
CLEAR SWCHR
AUTO
LOOKAHEAD
PGM
PVW SELECT
PVW MODE
DIM PVW
ALL KEYERS
DELEG KEYER
OFF
PUSH TO PVW
ON
OFF
PUSH TO PVW
TIMEOUT
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
BEEPER ON/OFF
WARNING
END OF KNOB
KNOB CENTER
INACTIVE KNOB
SHIFT MODE
KEYER PREFS
PREVIEW PREFS
BEEPER PREFS
DEFINE DEFAULTS
E-MEM PREFS
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E SELECT
GVG DEFAULT
SET DEFAULT
ENABLE/DISABLE
ENABLE/DISABLE
RUN LEVER
KEYFRAME EDITING
USER PREFS
SYSTEM PARAM
INPUTS
Mixer
Config
OUTPUTS
EXTERN I/F
AUX BUS FORMAT
4 X 3
16 X 9
FIELD 1
FIELD 2
NONE
ASPECT RATIO
FIELD DOMINANCE
MATTE GEN LIM
SET CLOCK
XMITABLE
VALID RGB
BOTH
NONE
SELECT
CONFIRM
DATE —
TIME —
YEAR
HOUR
MONTH
MINUTE
DAY
SECOND
See CONFG Part 2
See CONFG Part 3
Software Version 5.2
Figure 4-1. Mixer Config Menu Tree (Part 1)
4-3
Section 4— Menu Trees
UNSHAPED VIDEO
SHAPED VIDEO
VIDEO/KEY FORMAT
LOG/PHYS ASSIGNMENT
NAME XPT BUTTON
LOG CHANNEL
PHYS INPUTS
CURSOR BACK
ACCEPT CHAR
CURSOR FORWRD
DELETE CHAR
SAVE STRING
GET STRING
VIDEO INPUT
KEY INPUT
CHROMA KEY INPUT
ACCEPT NAME
See CONFG Part 1
COARSE TIMING
FINE TIMING
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
ON/OFF
RGB
BETA
YUV
MII
SETUP
INPUT FORMAT
USER PREFS
SYSTEM PARAM
INPUTS
MAP INPUTS
CHR KEY INPUTS
GPI INPUTS
GPI 1
GPI 2
GPI 3
GPI 4
GPI 5
GPI 6
GPI 7
GPI 8
Mixer
Config
OUTPUTS
EXTERN I/F
AUX BUS FORMAT
TOP TEST SIGNAL
BOTTOM TEST SIGNAL
AUX TALLY
DISABLE GPI
RUN
REWIND
AUTO RUN
REVERSE
GPI SELECT
MISC
KF EFFECT
AUTO TRANS
CUT
M/E 1 AUTO TRAN
M/E 2 AUTO TRAN
M/E 2 PST BLACK
See CONFG Part 3
E-MEM
FRAME STORE
PROGRAM GPI
M/E1
M/E2
M/E1 RECALL EFF
M/E2 RECALL EFF
MASTER RECALL EFF
AUTO RECALL MODE
EFF DISSSOLV
SEQUENCE MODE
VIDEO GRAB
KEY GRAB
Software Version 5.2
MASK GRAB
Figure 4-2. Mixer Config Menu Tree (Part 2)
4-4
Menu Tree Structures
10 BIT/ON
M/E 1 PGM
10 BIT/OFF
8 BIT/ON
ME1 PGM
ME2 PGM
M/E 1 CLEAN
M/E 2 PGM
M/E 2 CLEAN
AUX 1
8 BIT/OFF
OFF
PEAK WHITE
PEAK BLACK
BOTH
10 BIT/OFF
8 BIT/ON
OUTPUT SELECT
LUM LIMITER
AUX 2
CHROMA LIMITER
DIGITAL RES
10 BIT/ON
PEAK
OFF
10 BIT/OFF
8 BIT/ON
OUTPUT SELECT
8 BIT/OFF
RESOLUTION/DITHER
OUTPUT SELECT
RESOLUTION/DITHER
See CONFG Part 2
M/E 1 PVW 8 BIT/ON
M/E 2 PVW 10 BIT/ON
10 BIT/OFF
8 BIT/ON
See CONFG Part 1
DEVICE 1
DEVICE 2
DEVICE 3
DEVICE 4
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
BAUD
PARITY
KSCOPE
KRYSTAL
OTHER
ODD
EVEN
NONE
NONE
USER PREFS
SYSTEM PARAM
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
EXTERN I/F
INTERNAL
DEVICE SELECT
DPM TYPE
EDITOR I/F
DPM I/F
PERIPHERAL I/F
GPI OUTPUTS
Mixer
Config
SWR IN
SWR OUT
BOTH
CHANNEL ROUTING
DPM MAP AUX BUSES
DPM MAP INPUTS
AUX BUS FORMAT
OFF
DEVICE 1
VIDEO DELAY
CHAN 1-8
AUX 1-5
DEVICE 2
DEVICE 3
DEVICE 4
DEVICE SELECT
CONTROL DELAY
NO. OF CHANNELS
FIRST CHANNEL
DEVICE 1
DEVICE 2
DEVICE 3
DEVICE 4
1 – 8
SELECT GPI
E-MEM LEVEL
MISC
DPM 2
GPI LENGTH
DPM SELECT
CHANNEL SELECT
CHAN 1
CHAN 2
CHAN 3
CHAN 4
CHAN 5
CHAN 6
CHAN 7
CHAN 8
VIDEO INPUT
KEY INPUT
AUX BUS 3B
AUX BUS 4B
AUX BUS 5B
VIDEO
KEY
AUX BUS 1
AUX BUS SHAPING
AUX BUS 2
PHYS AUX SELECT
VIDEO/KEY FMT
SHAPED
UNSHAPED
Software Version 5.2
Figure 4-3. Mixer Config Menu Tree (Part 3)
4-5
Section 4— Menu Trees
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
FIRST PAGE
LAST PAGE
LAST RESET
CLEAR LOG
SYSTEM LOG
INSTALL INFO
DIAGS
Status
MODEL 2200-2x SOFTWARE VERSION: 5.2
Software Version 5.2
Figure 4-4. Status Menu Tree
ON
OFF
KEY FILTER
DITHER
FREE RUN
FRAME LOCK
OFF
FREE RUN
MATTE DITHER
FRAME LOCK
SIGNAL PROCESS
SAFE TITLE
Misc
ON
SAFE TITLE
OFF
SAFE TITLE SELECT
SAFE TITLE —
SCREEN CTR
TITLE & CTR
X-HATCH
SAFE TITLE H-POSITION
Software Version 5.2
Figure 4-5. Misc Menu Tree
4-6
Menu Tree Structures
M/E 1
M/E 2
LAYERED
STANDARD
ON
OFF
KEY 1 OPACITY
KEY 2 OPACITY
KEY A OPACITY
KEY B OPACITY
M/E SELECT
M/E MODE
FULL ADD MIX
M/E COPY
M/E
Mode
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 1
M/E 2
FROM M/E
TO M/E
DO M/E SWAP
DO M/E COPY
Software Version 5.2
Figure 4-6. M/E Mode Menu Tree
4-7
Section 4— Menu Trees
M/E 1
M/E 2
HORIZ KEY POSITION
OPACITY
KEY1
KEY2
KEYA
KEYB
ON
OFF
AUTO
M/E 1
M/E 2
KEY1
KEY2
KEYA
KEYB
M/E SELECT
KEYER SELECT
FROM GROUP
FROM KEYER
WIPES
TO GROUP
TO KEYER
EXCLUDE
INCLUDE
SHAPING
KEYER COPY
CALIBRATE
Keyer
M/E 1
M/E 2
VIDEO PROCESS
KEY 1 NAM
DO KEYER SWAP
DO KEYER COPY
KEY1
KEY2
KEYA
KEYB
KEY1
KEY2
KEYA
KEYB
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E SELECT
BUS SELECT
VIDEO PROCESS
CORING
RESTORE DEFAULTS
ON
OFF
LUM GAIN
CHROMA GAIN
DC OFFSET
ON
CORING
OFF
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E SELECT
NAM K2 INTO K1
RESTORE DEFAULTS
ON
OFF
NAM SOFTNESS
NAM OFFSET
Software Version 5.2
Figure 4-7. Keyer Menu Tree
4-8
Menu Tree Structures
M/E 1 KEY1
M/E 1 KEY2
M/E 2 KEY1
M/E 2 KEY2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
M/E 1 KEY1
M/E 1 KEY2
M/E 2 KEY1
M/E 2 KEY2
CHR KEY SELECT
FOREGROUND VIDEO
BACKGROUND VIDEO
FOREGROUND CORING
SECONDARY COLOR
HUE MODS
FOREGROUND CORING
VARIABLE
FIXED
OFF
Chroma
Key
SEC COLOR SUPPRESS ANGLE
SEC COLOR SUPPRESS SELECTIVITY
SEC CHROMA SUPPRESS LEVEL
FRINGE CONTROL
CHR KEY SELECT
SEC COLOR SUPPRESS
SUPPRESS MODE
KEY ADJUST
SETUP
CHROMA
LUMA
SHADOW GAIN
SHADOW CLIP
M/E 1 KEY1
M/E 1 KEY2
M/E 2 KEY1
M/E 2 KEY2
SEPARATE HUE SUPPRESS ANGLE
FOREGROUND FLARE SUPPRESS
CHR KEY SELECT
ON
OFF
ON
SEP HUE SUPPRESS
FLARE SUPPRESS
FGD NOISE SUPPRESS
OFF
HIGH
MEDIUM
LOW
OFF
M/E 1 KEY1
M/E 1 KEY2
M/E 2 KEY1
M/E 2 KEY2
ON
KEY WIDTH
OFF
CHR KEY SELECT
KEY WIDTH
ON
KEY SOFTNESS
KEY SOFTNESS
KEY POSITION
FGD RESHAPING
KEY S-SHAPING
OFF
HORIZ KEY POSITION
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
M/E 1 KEY1
M/E 1 KEY2
M/E 2 KEY1
M/E 2 KEY2
CHR KEY SELECT
AUTO SETUP
CANCEL
Software Version 5.2
Figure 4-8. Chroma Key Menu Tree
4-9
Section 4— Menu Trees
SUPERBLACK
NORMAL
SUPERBLACK
NORMAL
KEY 1 FILL
KEY 1 BORD
KEY 2 FILL
KEY 2 BORD
PRI WIPE
BKGD 1 LUM
BKGD 2 LUM
Matte
M/E 1
M/E 2
BKGD
2 TO 1
1 TO 2
MATTE 2
MATTE 1
BOTH
MATTE COPY
TEXTURE
FROM GROUP
FROM MATTE GEN
SIDE SELECT
SEC WIPE
TO GROUP
M/E 1
TO MATTE GEN
DO MATTE SWAP
DO MATTE COPY
M/E 2
BKGD
KEY 1 FILL
KEY 1 BORD
KEY 2 FILL
KEY 2 BORD
PRI WIPE
SEC WIPE
HORIZ STRETCH
VERT MODE
FILTER MODE
LENGTH A
1:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 6:1, 8:1
1:1, 2:1, 4:1, 6:1, 8:1, FREE RUN
SMOOTHING
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
1, 2, 3, 4
NOTCH
NONE
LENGTH B
SOURCE
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Software Version 5.2
Figure 4-9. Matte Menu Tree
4-10
Menu Tree Structures
M/E 1 PRI
M/E 1 SEC
M/E 2 PRI
M/E 2 SEC
PATTERN SELECT
M/E1 PRI
M/E1 SEC
M/E2 PRI
M/E2 SEC
WIPE GEN SELECT
HORIZ STRETCH
VERT MODE
FILTER MODE
LENGTH A
1:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 6:1, 8:1
1:1, 2:1, 4:1, 6:1, 8:1, FREE RUN
SMOOTHING
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
NOTCH
1, 2, 3, 4
LENGTH B
NONE
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
SOURCE
M/E1 PRI
M/E1 SEC
M/E2 PRI
M/E2 SEC
PATTERN
TEXTURE
WIPE MODS
WIPE COPY
NAM–
NAM+
MIX
WIPE
WIPE GEN SELECT
PTN MIX TYPE
PTN MIX SOURCE
SPLIT OFFSET
TEXTURE
NORMAL
PST PTN DIRECTION
WIPE MODULATE
ON
OFF
SPLIT OFFSET
M/E1 PRI
M/E1 SEC
M/E2 PRI
M/E2 SEC
REVERSE
NORMAL
LOCK
HORIZ
VERT
OFF
MODULATION AMPLITUDE
WIPE GEN SELECT
MODULATE
MODULATE WAVEFORM
MODULATION FREQUENCY
TRIANGLE
SINE
M/E 1
M/E 2
FROM GROUP
FROM WIPE GEN
TO GROUP
PRI
SEC
M/E 1
M/E 2
TO WIPE GEN
DO WIPE SWAP
DO WIPE COPY
PRI
Software Version 5.2
SEC
Figure 4-10. Wipe Menu Tree
4-11
Section 4— Menu Trees
CLEAR REG
LOCK REG
CLEAR SEQ
SELECT
ALL
BANK
REG
LOCK / UNLOCK / CLEAR
LOCK / UNLOCK / CLEAR
LOCK / UNLOCK / CLEAR
CLEAR ALL HOLDS
ALL HOLD
SOURCE HOLD
ON
OFF
BUS
CLEAR ALL
SET ALL
DEVICE (##)
ON
OFF
DEVICE NUMBER
M/E 1
M/E 2
MISC
BKGD
CHAN 1
CHAN 2
GLOBAL 1
CAMERA
DPM 2
ENABLE
DISABLE
REGISTER
SOURCE HOLD
PERIPH DEVICES
ON
OFF
TRANSITION
KEY1
KEY2
KEYA
SELECT LEVEL
PAUSE
SELECT GROUP
PATH TYPE
RUN LEVER
E-MEM
KEYFRAME EDITING
KF PATHS
GPI & PBUS TRIGGERS
KEYB
WIPES
WIPEXFORM
ALL
HOLD
LINEAR
S-LINEAR
A, B, C, D, E, F, G, or H
SELECT PERIPH
ATTACH PERIPH
FIRE (A–H)
MISC
OFF
FIRE ATTACHED
SELECT GPI
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or8
ATTACH GPI
FIRE (1–8)
MISC
OFF
FIRE ATTACHED
Software Version 5.2
Figure 4-11. E-MEM Menu Tree
4-12
Menu Tree Structures
M/E 1
M/E 2
PGM PST
DSK
MISC
BKGD
DPM 1
DPM 2
DPM 3
DPM 4
DELEGATES / ENABLES
TIME ALIGN LEVELS
SET START TIME
RUN
TIME KNOB SELECT
RUN DEL
START
KF
ZOOM
EFF DUR
M/E 1
M/E 2
PGM PST
DSK
MISC
BKGD
DPM 1
DPM 2
DPM 3
DPM 4
SELECT LEVEL
SELECT GROUP
PATH TYPE
TRANSISTION
KEY1
KEY2
KEYA
KEYB
WIPES
WIPEXFORM
ALL
TIMELINE
KF PATHS
ENABLE
DISABLE
HOLD
KEYFRAME EDITING
RUN LEVER
MOD ALL ABSOLUTE
ENABLE BUTTONS
ATTACH GPI
LINEAR
S-LINEAR
CURVE
ENABLE
DISABLE
KEY
FRAME
DELEGATES
ENABLES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ATTACH TRIGGER
SELECT GPI
ATTACH
FIRE GPI (1-8)
FIRE ATTACHED
ON
OFF
A
B
C
D
E
F
TRIGGER SELECT
ATTACH
FIRE (A-H)
FIRE ATTACHED
G
H
Software Version 5.3
ON
OFF
Figure 4-12. Keyframe Menu Tree
4-13
Section 4— Menu Trees
FROM PAGE
TO PAGE
KEY PROCESS
DO COMPRESS
COMPRESSION
VIDEO STORE
KEY STORE
FROM STORE
FROM PAGE
TO PAGE
FILTER PROCESS
DO FILTER
ON
OFF
SHADOW BLUR
SHADOW BLUR SYMMETRY
EMBOSS
SHARPEN
SOFTEN
COMPRESS
FILTER
ON
OFF
DRP SHADOW BLUR
LOCK VIDEO / KEY
PICTURE PROCESS
PARAM COPY
VIDEO STORE
BEVEL
COPY
BOTTOM
TOP
RIGHT
LEFT
FROM PAGE
TO PAGE
LIGHT SOURCE
DO BEVEL
Frame
Store
KEY STORE
MASK STORE
FROM STORE
FROMPAGE
TO STORE
TO PAGE
DO SWAP
DO COPY
VIDEO STORE
KEY STORE
See
Part 2
VIDEO STORE
KEY STORE
FROM STORE
TO STORE
DO SWAP
VIDEO STORE
KEY STORE
DO COPY
Software Version 5.2
Figure 4-13. Frame Store Menu Tree (part 1)
4-14
Menu Tree Structures
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
PAGE SELECT
STROBE TIME PERIOD
STROBE FREEZE PERIOD
ON
OFF
POSTR/SOLR
HUE MOD
COLOR MOD
CONTRAST
ON
OFF
MOSAIC
MOSAIC SIZE
ON
POSTERIZATION
MOSAIC ASPECT
OFF
HUE MOD START PHASE
HUE MOD END PHASE
FIRST ACTIVE PIXEL
REVERSE VIDEO
UNSHAPE/RESHAPE
MODE SELECT
HUE MOD SATURATION
BLACK HUE
BLACK SAT
POSTERIZE / HUE MOD
/ COLOR MOD / CONTRAST
SOLARIZE / HUE MOD PATH
BLK/WHT DELEGATE
BLACK BRIGHT
SOLARIZATION
ON
OFF
CW
See
Part 1
CCW
STROBE
MOSAIC
PSEUDO COLOR
CROP
REPOSITION
FILTER
TOP
BOTTOM
LEFT
ON
BLACK / WHITE HUE
BLACK / WHITE SAT
BLACK / WHITE BRIGHT
CROP
OFF
DRP SHADOW BLUR
LOCK VIDEO/KEY
KEY STORE MODE
PICTURE COPY
PARAM COPY
RIGHT
COARSE ADJUST HORIZ
FINE ADJUST HORIZONTAL
ON
OFF
HORIZONTAL POSITION
VERTICAL POSITION
PIXEL DETENT
Frame
Store
ON
OFF
ON
COARSE ADJUST VERTICAL
FINE ADJUST VERTICAL
VIDEO STORE
KEY STORE
RESTORE DEFAULTS
MASK STORE
*
OFF
ON
BLUR
OFF
CHROMA BLUR
BLURE SEMETRY
FILTER SELECT
BLUR
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
SEPARATE LUM / CHROMA
BLUR SYMMETRY
LUM BLUR
FILTER SELECT
HUE ROTATE
ON
OFF
HUE ANGLE
PAGE SELECT
STROBE TIME PERIOD
STROBE FREEZE PERIOD
TOP
BOTTOM
LEFT
ON
OFF
STROBE
CROP
ON
OFF
RIGHT
CROP
REPOSITION
FILTER
COARSE ADJUST HORIZ
FINE ADJUST HORIZONTAL
ON
OFF
HORIZONTAL POSITION
VERTICAL POSITION
PIXEL DETENT
ON
OFF
ON
COARSE ADJUST VERTICAL
FINE ADJUST VERTICAL
RESTORE DEFAULTS
OFF
ON
BLUR
OFF
ON
OFF
Software Version 5.2
BLUR
BLUR SYMMETRY
BLUR SYMMETRY
DRAW
ON
DRAW MODE
BRUSH SOURCE
SAVE
FILL SHAPE
BLACK SCREEN
WHITE SCREEN
UNDO
OFF
STRAIGHT
FREEHAND
BLACK
WHITE
BRUSH OPACITY
BRUSH SIZE
BRUSH SOFTNESS
* MASK STORE operation is enabled using the Frame Store module option.
Figure 4-14. Frame Store Menu Tree (part 2)
4-15
Section 4— Menu Trees
PVW BUS
MASK BUS
AUX BUS 1 – 5
BUS SELECT
EFF LOOP MODE
E-MEM CONTROL
NEAR SIDE
FAR SIDE
NO LOOP
EXT LOOP
FRAME STORE
Aux
Bus
BOTH
TAKE
VIDEO
KEY
Software Version 5.2
Figure 4-15. Aux Bus Menu Tree
4-16
Appendix A — Keyframe
Path Control
A
Tension, Continuity, and Bias Controls
The path that an effect takes between keyframes may be adjusted
through the CURVE path type selection from the Keyframe Path
Menu.
If CURVE is selected, three soft knobs are provided to control the
three parameters of the vector. These are labeled: Tension,
Continuity, and Bias.
The adjustment of these controls can affect the keyframe path in
various ways. Interactions between the controls are numerous
and each will be described in the following paragraphs. You may
want to experiment with the interactions by adjusting the controls
in small increments.
In the following examples, a physical path is shown between three
keyframes. The first keyframe (KF1) is the upper left square; the
last keyframe (KF3) is the lower right square. The adjustments in
these examples are applied to the middle keyframe only (KF2).
A-1
Appendix A — Keyframe Path Control
Path Vectors
With respect to the path between keyframes, each keyframe is
made up of three vector parameters as shown below. The soft
knob controls act on these vector parameters to adjust the path
into (entry) and out of (exit) the keyframe. The path through KF2
is parallel with an imaginary line drawn between KF1 and KF2.
–
Tension Vector
Bias
+
KF1
KF2
Continuity Vectors
KF3
A-2
Tension, Continuity, and Bias Controls
Tension Control
In the example below, the keyframes are at right angles so the
(TENSION) control operates on a 45° line drawn through the
keyframe. This line is referred to as the Tension Vector and is
parallel to a line drawn between adjacent keyframes (see
illustration).
The (TENSION) soft knob controls the length of the tension vector.
At a Tension setting of 0, this imaginary line extends an equal
distance into and out of the keyframe, and the path through the
middle keyframe is curved.
The unmodified KF2 is said to have a correction value of 0 (see
Example 1).
Example 1
Tension Vector
KF1
KF2
Tension = 0.0
KF3
A-3
Appendix A — Keyframe Path Control
In Example 2, the (TENSION) control is increased to 1.00, so that the
Tension vector is shortened to non-existence through KF2.
The path enters and leaves the middle keyframe in a straight line
as it takes on an S-Linear motion; decelerating as it enters the
middle keyframe and accelerating as it leaves.
Example 2
No Tension Vector
KF1
KF2
Tension = 1.0
KF3
A-4
Tension, Continuity, and Bias Controls
In Example 3, the (TENSION) control has been set to -1.00. This
produces an effect of lengthening the Tension vector, causing the
path through the middle keyframe to be longer and broader.
The longer path will appear to make the image speed up through
KF2 as it travels from KF1 to KF3.
Example 3
Tension Vector
KF2
KF1
Tension = -1.0
KF3
A-5
Appendix A — Keyframe Path Control
Continuity Control
The continuity adjustment determines the angle of the path into
and out of the keyframe. It is represented by vectors at 90 degrees
to each as shown in Example 4.
Example 4
Continuity Vectors
+1.0
+1.0
-1.0
KF1
KF2
-1.0
Continuity = 0.0
KF3
The unmodified path shown above is identical to the unmodified
path of the other controls.
A-6
Tension, Continuity, and Bias Controls
With continuity set to 1.00, the entry path through the keyframe is
pulled to point at the following keyframe or exit path. The effect
of 1.00 continuity is that of motion dropping into and then out of
the keyframe, similar to a bouncing ball (see Example 5).
Example 5
+1.0
KF1
+1.0
-1.0
KF2
-1.0
Continuity = 1.00
KF3
A-7
Appendix A — Keyframe Path Control
With continuity set to -1.00, the paths between the keyframes
become straight lines, accelerating through the keyframe (see
Example 6).
Example 6
+1.0
-1.0
KF1
+1.0
KF2
-1.0
Continuity = -1.00
KF3
A-8
Tension, Continuity, and Bias Controls
Bias Control
The (BIAS) control determines whether the path will be “pulled”
towards the previous or the following keyframe. With extreme
settings, all of the biasing will occur either before or after KF2.
With bias set to 0, the curve through the keyframe is gentle as
shown in Example 7 below.
Example 7
-
Tension Vector
Bias Vector
+
KF1
KF2
Bias = 0.0
KF3
NOTE: A Tension vector MUST be present for Bias control to have an
effect.
A-9
Appendix A — Keyframe Path Control
With the bias set to 1.00, the path is pulled towards the previous
keyframe. Entrance and exit to the keyframe are on a straight line
from the previous keyframe (see Example 8), and the path of the
effect travels completely through KF2 before turning towards
KF3.
Example 8
-
+
Entry Bias
KF1
KF2
Bias = 1.0
Tension Vector
KF3
A-10
Tension, Continuity, and Bias Controls
With the bias set to -1.00, the path is pulled towards the following
keyframe. Entrance and exit to the keyframe are a straight line
pointed to the following keyframe (see Example 9).
Example 9
Exit Bias
-
Tension Vector
Bias
+
KF1
KF2
Bias = -1.0
KF3
A-11
Appendix A — Keyframe Path Control
A-12
Index
Symbols
. Button 2-45
Joy Stick Override 2-103
A
Aspect Button 2-68
Aspect Knob 2-68
Attach GPI Menu 3-91
Auto Delegation
B
Control Panel 2-8
Menu Delegation 2-10
Auto delegation 2-8
Auto Preview 2-29
Bank 0 Button 2-41
Bkgd Button 2-47
Border Button 2-28, 2-68
Borderline
Auto Recall Button 2-48
Auto Run Button 2-48
Auto Select Key Button 2-25
Auto Setup Button 2-32
Auto Trans Button 2-17
Auto transition 2-19
Aux 1 Through Aux 5 Buttons 2-90
Aux Area
Aux Bus Select 2-90
Bus Delegate Buttons 2-89
Effects Send Buttons 2-88
Mask Bus 2-89
Preview Bus 2-89
Preview Only Buttons 2-88
Source Select Buttons 2-88
Aux Bus
Controls 2-27
Key Generation 1-14
Opacity Knob 2-28
Format Menu 3-49
Panels (Remote) 2-100
Size/ Position Knob 2-28
Bottom/ Clip Knob 2-76
Index-1
Index
Box Button 2-74
Brightness Knob 2-35, 2-85
Buttons
DPM Map Inputs Menu 3-41
External Interface Menu 3-31
DPM Setup Menu 3-33
FIELD 1 2-98
FIELD 2 2-98
FRZE 2-98
Peripheral Interface Menu 3-44
GRAB 2-98
C
Camera Button 2-48
Chan 1 Button 2-48
Chan 2 Button 2-48
Chop 2-102
Name Crosspoint Button
Menu 3-26
Chroma Key
Adjust Menu 3-70
Button 2-22
Hue Modifiers Menu 3-69
Inputs Menu 3-27
Menu 3-65
Outputs Menu 3-30
Chroma Key Adjust Menu 3-70
Chroma Key Hue Modifiers Menu
3-69
Chroma Key Secondary Color
Menu 3-67
Chroma Key Setup Menu 3-72
Secondary Color Menu 3-67
Setup Menu 3-72
On 2-57
Chroma Keyer Area 2-30
Controls 2-31
Delegation 2-31
Delegation 2-8
Positioner 2-64
Chroma Knob 2-32
Chromatte™ Chroma Keyer 1-14
Clear Keyer Memory Menu 3-12
Clip Knob 2-22
Control Panel Areas
Aux, Pvw, and Mask Source Select
Area 2-87 to 2-93
Chroma Keyer 2-30 to 2-32
Effects Memory 2-36 to 2-63
Keyer 2-21 to 2-29
Clock (Setting) 3-20
Configuration Menus 3-7 to 3-52
Aux Bus Format Menu 3-49
Clear Keyer Memory Menu 3-12
DPM Map Aux Buses Menu 3-37
Matte 2-33 to 2-35
Index-2
Index
Preview/ Aux Bus Source Select and
Delegate Area 2-
E-MEM Registers 2-37
Enable Buttons 2-47
87 to 2-93
Source Selection Area 2-4
Wipe Area 2-65 to 2-72
Copy Button 2-56
Learning Effects 2-37
Crosspoint
E-MEM Override 2-38
Crosspoint Name Display 2-7
Cut Button 2-20, 2-56
D
Date (Setting) 3-20
Define Defaults Menu 3-17
Deletion Modes 2-53
Disk Menu 3-131
Load File Menu 3-134
Save File Menu 3-136
Name File Menu 3-138
Utilities Menu 3-139
. Button 2-45
DPM Aux Bus Menu 3-36
DPM Map Aux Buses Menu 3-37
DPM Map Inputs Menu 3-41
DPM Setup Menu 3-33
DPOPs 2-10
DROP SHOW Knob 2-97
Dropshadows 2-81, 2-97
Keypad 2-39
Learning Effects 2-37
Modes of Insertion/ Deletion 2-53
Modify All Keyframes (Relative) 2-59
E
Peripheral Devices Menu 3-88
Source Hold Menu 3-87
E-MEM Register Menu 3-83
Enable All Button 2-48
Enter Button 2-41
Edit Enable Button 2-82
Editor Interface Menu 3-32
Effect Dis Button 2-43
Effect Dur Button 2-60
Effect Indicator 2-14
External Interface
Effects Memory Area 2-36
Constant Duration Off 2-54
Area 2-82
Menu 3-31
Index-3
Index
Extrude Button 2-28
F
Features, optional 1-3
Features, standard 1-2
FIELD 1 Button 2-98
FIELD 1 or 2 Button 2-80
FIELD 2 Button 2-98
Field Mode 2-80, 2-99
Flat Matte Button 2-35, 2-85
Flip Flop Button 2-70
Floppy Disk Drive 2-86
Force Mask Button 2-29, 2-74
Four-Field Mode 2-80, 2-99
Frame Store 1-15
I
After Button 2-55
Before Button 2-54
Area 2-95
Menu 3-107
option 2-77 to 2-81
Shadow Controls 2-97
Insertion Modes 2-53
FRZE Button 2-80, 2-98
G
Joy Stick Override 2-103
Gain Knob 2-22
Get Button 2-50
Global Button 2-48
Go To
Kf Button 2-60
Time Button 2-60
GPI
Enable Button 2-83
Inputs Menu 3-28
GRAB Button 2-98
GRAB button 2-80
K1 Border Indicator 2-34
K1 Fill Indicator 2-34
K2 Border Indicator 2-34
Kaleidoscope Sources Mapping, DPM 3-36
KEY
STORE Button 2-79
Key
Input Selection 2-4
Primary Inputs 2-5
Still Image Storage 2-97
H
H Multi Button 2-71
Index-4
Index
Key 1 Button 2-13, 2-22
Key 1 NAM Menu 3-63
Key 2 Button 2-13, 2-22
Key Delegation Lamps 2-6
Key On Indicator 2-22
Key Over Button 2-26
Key Priority Button 2-13
Key Source Buttons 2-25
Key Store
L
Crop Menu 3-125
Filter Menu 3-127
Lum Knob 2-32
Menu 3-124
Reposition Menu 3-126
Key Type Buttons 2-22
Keyer Area 2-21
M
Auto Preview 2-29
Borderline® Controls 2-27
Key Source Buttons 2-25
Key Type Buttons 2-22
Keyer Delegation Buttons 2-22
Mask Control 2-29
M/ E 1
Split Key 2-26
M/ E 2
Keyer Copy Menu 3-61
Keyer Delegation Buttons 2-22
Keyer Menu 3-59
Key 1 NAM Menu 3-63
Keyer Copy Menu 3-61
Video Process Menu 3-62
Keyer Preferences Menu 3-11
Keyframe Menu 3-93
Attach GPI Menu 3-91
Keyframe Path Menu 3-89
Keyframe Path Menu 3-89
Keypad 2-39
Pvw Button 2-88
Sec Button 2-66
Map Inputs Menu 3-24, 3-43
Mark
KF Dur Button 2-59
Knobs
DROP SHOW 2-97
H POSITION 2-97
OPACITY 2-97
V POSITION 2-97
Block Button 2-61
Button 2-61
Cursor Button 2-53
Krystal, setup 3-34
Index-5
Index
Mask
Video Store Filter 3-122, 3-123
Bus Button 2-75
Button 2-89
Control 2-29
Invert Button 2-76
Menu 3-104
Select Area 2-87
Mask Selection
Bus Delegate Buttons 2-89
Mask Bus Selection 2-89
MASK STORE Button 2-79
Masks Area 2-73 to 2-76
Delegation buttons 2-74
Mask Controls 2-75
Source Selection 2-74, 2-88
Matte 2 Button 2-35, 2-85
Matte Background Area 2-84
Matte Select Buttons 2-84
Modifier controls 2-85
Matte Copy Menu 3-106
Matte Fill Button 2-24
Matte Generator Area 2-33
Delegation 2-34
Menus
Matte Menus 3-105 to 3-107
MATTE SELECT Indicators 2-34
Modifier controls 2-35
Matte Menu 3-105
Matte Copy Menu 3-106
Matte Select Button 2-34
Menu
Mix Button 2-15
Buttons 3-3
Delegation 2-10, 3-4
Key Store 3-124
Modes
Field 2-80, 2-99
Key Store Crop 3-125
Key Store Filter 3-127
Key Store Reposition 3-126
Knobs 3-3
Replicate 2-80, 2-99
Shadow 2-81, 2-97
Posterization/ Solarization 3-116
Pseudo Color Contrast 3-118
Pseudo Color Hue Modification 3-116
Pseudo Color Modification 3-117
Video Store 3-112
Modes of Insertion/ Deletion 2-53
Constant Duration Off 2-54
Constant Duration On 2-57
Modify All Keyframes (Relative) 2-59
Modify Button 2-58
Index-6
Index
Modify Keyframes 2-58
Delegate Area 2-
87 to 2-93
Wipe Area 2-65 to 2-72
Paste Button 2-57
. Button 2-45
N
Name Crosspoint Button Menu 3-26
Name File Menu 3-138
Next Button 2-60
Next transition buttons 2-13
Normal Button 2-27, 2-70
Peripheral
Preset
Preview Preferences Menu 3-13
Pri Wipe
O
OPACITY Knob 2-81, 2-97
Opacity Knob 2-68
Options
Borderline Key Edge Generation 1-14
Chromatte Advanced Chroma Keyer
1-14
Effects Send 1-15
Frame Store 1-15
Look Ahead Preview 1-15
Remote Aux Bus 1-16
Secondary Wipe Generator 1-14
Tally Relay 1-15
Timed Aux Output 1-16
Outline Button 2-28
Outputs
Button 2-74
Indicator 2-34
Wash Button 2-35, 2-85
Menu 3-30
Routing Frame Store 2-79, 2-96
Over Indicator 2-14, 2-27
Modification Menu 3-117
Put Button 2-51
Pvw Button 2-89
Pvw Select area 2-87
Pvw/ Aux Area
P
Panel Areas
Aux, Pvw, and Mask Source Select
Area 2-87 to 2-93
Chroma Keyer 2-30 to 2-32
Delegation 2-8
Effects Memory 2-36 to 2-63
Keyer 2-21 to 2-29
Aux Bus Select 2-90
Bus Delegate Buttons 2-89
Effects Send Buttons 2-88
Index-7
Index
Mask Bus 2-89
Preview Bus 2-89
Preview Only buttons 2-88
Source Select Buttons 2-88
R
Shadow
Random Button 2-66
Recalling Effects 2-38
Re-entry Buttons 2-6
Remote Aux Bus 1-16
Remote Aux Bus Panels 2-100
Chop 2-102
Joy Stick Override 2-103
Rear Panel Switches 2-102
Remote Aux Operation 2-102
Source Selection 2-101
Replicate Mode 2-80, 2-99
Reverse Button 2-63, 2-70
Rewind Button 2-63
Right Knob 2-76
Signal Processing Menu 3-129
Softness Knob 2-67
Secondary Source Selection 2-6
Split Button 2-71
Rot Pos Button 2-69
Rotate
Knob 2-69
Mag Button 2-69
Split Key
Speed Button 2-69
Run
Indicator 2-26
Key 2-79, 2-97
Button 2-62
Controls 2-61
Lever Arm 2-63
Stop Next KF Button 2-62
S
Subpanel
Safe Title Menu 3-130
Saturation/ Offset Knob 2-35
Saturation/ Softness Knob 2-85
Save File Menu 3-136
Sec Wipe
Frame Store 2-77
Symmetry Knob 2-68
System Parameters Menu 3-18
Button 2-75
Index-8
Index
T
Tally Relay 1-15
Texture Button 2-66
Time
Video Store
Cursor Button 2-53
Setting 3-20
Menu 3-112
Timed Aux Output 1-16
Top/ Gain Knob 2-76
Tran Rate Button 2-46
Transition Areas 2-12
Next Transition Buttons 2-13
Layered Mode 2-14
Standard Mode 2-13
Transition Controls 2-17
Transition Type 2-15
Transition Controls 2-17
Transition type buttons 2-15 to 2-17
W
Width Knob 2-68
Wipe Pattern Modifiers 2-71
Wipe Positioner Buttons 2-71
Wipe Rotation Controls 2-69
U
Uncal Indicators 2-6
Undo Button 2-45
User 1—User 6 Buttons 2-67
User Preferences Menu 3-9
User Wipe Undo Button 2-67
Utilities Menu 3-139
Wipe Menu 3-73
Wipe Modulation Menu 3-77
Wipe Pattern Menu 3-74
Wipe Texture Menu 3-75
V
V Multi Button 2-71
V POSITION Knob 2-81, 2-97
Video
Input Selection 2-4
Primary Inputs 2-5
Still Image Storage 2-97
Video Fill Button 2-24
Video Key Button 2-25
Video Process Menu 3-62
Index-9
Index
Index-10
|